Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and customize the project as necessary. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. schedules. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. click Training Files. you will use the default template. and plans. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. sections. the floor or roof remains connected. every drawing sheet. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. and schedules required for a building project. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. If you move the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. quantities. As you work in drawing and schedule views. For most tutorial projects. 12 Select DefaultMetric. In this case. and open Metric\Templates. 13 Click OK. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. 2D and 3D view. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. and residential. hence. how to navigate the user interface. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. and click Open. construction. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. and phases when you need it. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. You learn the terminology. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. the hierarchy of elements. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. the operation of the software is parametric. review the Revit Architecture templates. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. In this case. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. In the Revit Architecture model. the door retains this relationship to the partition. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. scope. drawing sheets. drawings. If the length of the elevation is changed. the parameter is one of association or connection.rte.

When you change something. They help to describe or document the model. For example. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. For example. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. windows. filled regions. For example. For example. tags. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. dimensions. doors. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. If you can draw. walls and roofs are hosts. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. and keynotes are annotation elements. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. windows. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example. and roofs are model elements. For example. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. They display in relevant views of the model. and cabinets are model components. Datum elements help to define project context. doors. Examples include detail lines. walls. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. levels. Understanding the Basics | 7 . grids. and 2D detail components. and reference planes are datum elements. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. tags. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. dimensions. programming is not required.

In other cases. This information includes components used to design the model. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. Project: In Revit Architecture. top of wall. Often. and so forth). you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. such as roofs. elevation views. schedules. first floor. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. for example. from geometry to construction data. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Most often. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. families. To place levels. you must be in a section or elevation view. section views. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. floors. The project file contains all information for the building design. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. and ceilings.In Revit Architecture. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . By using a single project file. and types. and drawings of the design. for example. you can explicitly control them. or bottom of foundation. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. However. views of the project. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building.

Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. System families can be transferred between projects. dimensions. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. For example. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). ceilings. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . A type can be a specific size of a family. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. For example. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. floors. identical use. System families include walls. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. In the following illustration. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow. A type can also be a style. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. and levels. and similar graphical representation. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. making it easy to understand what each button represents. categories of model elements include walls and beams. For example. roofs. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. However.

the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click (New). This creates a new project based on the default template. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. By default. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. In addition.

Click View menu ➤ Zoom. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. which are listed on the menu. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. Edit. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . Many of the commands have shortcut keys. you type the required key combination to perform the command. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. While working in the drawing area. For example. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. and View.

a door type is specified. On the left side of the Options Bar. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. For example. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. When you select the Door tool. when you add a door. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. 9 In the Type Selector. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available.

You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . In the drawing area. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. containing buttons grouped by function. immediately below the Type Selector.

Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar.11 Click OK. select Views (all). ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. click the tab in the Design Bar. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The respective commands display on the Design Bar. In the Project Browser. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu.

and groups. windows). Navigating the User Interface | 15 . To open a view. family category (doors. The browser is dockable. delete. schedules. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. and rename views. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. 3D). elevations. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. and group name. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. sheets. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. double-click its name. families. walls. reports. families. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector.

16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click Wall. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. In the bottom left corner of the window. The cursor displays as a pencil. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. Do not click. click Cancel. In this case. After creating a browser organization scheme.

you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. click on the Standard toolbar. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. Toolbar: From the toolbar. Tooltips: To see tooltips. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. In the status bar. Click the Help button. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. find a keyword on the Index tab. 20 Press TAB. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. in conjunction with tooltips. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. You can also press SHIFT+F1. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. The status bar also provides information. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. In addition. You can use this tri-pane. regarding selected elements in a view. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. After you are familiar with these tasks. press F1 for help. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. There are several tools that help you find information. press F1 for context-sensitive help. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. click Modify to end the Wall command.18 On the Design Bar. If no Help button displays. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). It highlights when the cursor is over it. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. Windows: From any window. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. When you place the cursor over an element.

Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. 5 On the View toolbar. the view zooms out from the building model. There are several ways to access zoom options. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). In the following steps. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window.rvt. In the drawing area. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. click Training Files. For example.

NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. When you release the mouse button. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. To modify or add snap increments. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. the view zooms in on the selected area. on the View toolbar. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. As you move the mouse. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. NOTE As you zoom in and out. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. 7 Click in the drawing area. 10 To display SteeringWheels. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. . If you do not have a wheel mouse. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again.

17 Type ZR. Similar controls. display along the ends. and click Help. and select the wall. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. called drag controls. bottoms. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. and double-click 2nd Flr. Cnst. moving the wheel to the desired location. press ESC. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. and click the SteeringWheels tab. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction .13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. as shown. Small blue dots. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. These are the drag controls. To define settings for SteeringWheels. 15 To exit the wheel. When drawing or modifying a building model. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. referred to as shape handles. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). click Settings menu ➤ Options. For more information about SteeringWheels. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. and then using the Zoom tool again.

click (Move). 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. such as Move and Copy. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. as shown. and on the Tools toolbar. require 2 clicks to complete the command. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. 23 Click next to the lower wall. Some commands. you want to move the table closer to the wall. and click again to specify the ending position. for example.18 Click and drag the left control. In this case. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. After selecting the element to move. to lengthen the wall. The table moves down. click to specify the starting position. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan.

The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. on the Standard toolbar. select the second item in the list. click Lines. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo).Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. Some commands. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. In this example. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. or press CTRL+Z. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. Move. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. All changes you make to a project are tracked. and drag it on top of the table. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The table and plant are returned to their original locations. and click again to end it. such as the Lines command. click the Undo command. 24 Select the plant. 26 On the Undo menu.

Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . On the Design Bar. click Modify.29 To end the command. Press ESC twice. 30 Close the file without saving your changes. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

In this tutorial. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. this tutorial uses imperial units only. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. Use detail components to define an assembly. or referenced as a drafting view. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. In Revit Architecture. detail. but for training purposes. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. 27 . illustrating how building components work together. When you have finished these tutorials. and annotate building assemblies.

rvt. import a DWG detail. click Training Files. If necessary. 3 In the Scale list. scroll until the folder is displayed. and reference a drafting view. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . enter Window Head Detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. click Drafting View. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. create a reference callout. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Name. you will create a drafting view.

and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. The model zooms out. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1.In the Project Browser. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. and click Open. 9 Type ZR. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. 10 In the drawing area. select Black and White.). drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. as shown. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. located directly to the left of the drawing area. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. displaying the extents of the detail. The drawing area is still blank. 6 In the Colors field list.dwg. click Training Files.

11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. to activate the view selection list. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. select Detail View: Detail. 12 On the Options Bar. in the Type Selector. 14 In the drawing area. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”.The view displays to the specified area. click Callout. and in the Scale list. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 13 Click Reference other view.

Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. select Detail View: Detail.The reference callout is created. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. adjust the detail view display settings. in the Type Selector. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. and in the Scale list. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . double-click the reference callout tag head.rvt. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. 3 In the drawing area. select Callout. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. c_express_workshop_details_start. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”.

enter Wall Base 1. under Detail Views(Detail). under Detail Views (Detail). 6 In the drawing area. 5 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Wall Base 1. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. 8 On the Design Bar. and click Rename. click Modify to clear the selection.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. and click OK. for Name. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. 4 Right-click Detail 0.

11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region. This is the view crop region. bordered by a solid line.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. Model-Based Detailing | 33 .

16 Click OK. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. click (Hide Crop Region). 14 In the drawing area. 13 On the View Control Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select As Underlay.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. and click View Properties. right-click. under Graphics. and click OK. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . for Display Model.

and press ENTER. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . 20 In the drawing area. 19 In the Type Selector. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. If the crop region is enlarged. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. Stud. on the Options Bar.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. 17 On the View Control Bar. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. type 1' 6''. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”.Brick on Mtl. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. typical details can easily be placed. click Detail Components. Directly above the drawing area. By grouping detail components.

add the following detail components as shown. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. 23 Using the same method. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. and click Create Instance. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. 25 In the Project Browser. click Modify to end the command. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .22 Press ESC twice to end the command. as shown.

Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 . ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation.28 Press ESC to end the command. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously.4" Slab detail.

and format keynote styles. and under Keynote Table. and verify that Horizontal. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type.rvt. In the next exercise. or instructions within a construction documentation package. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. map keynotes by material.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. click Keynote ➤ Element. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. for Full Path. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. click Browse. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. c_express_workshop_details_start. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. and Free End are selected. click Training Files. in the type selector. 4 On the Options Bar. Leader. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You can customize this list. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . For more information about customizing a keynote database. special notes. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple.txt.

Keynoting | 39 . If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. 7 Click to place the leader arm. 8 Click to place the tag. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. Either move the text inside. 9 Press ESC to end the command. a question mark displays. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . If no value has been specified.5 In the drawing area.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area.

navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. 15 Select 07 21 00. click Keynote ➤ Material. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. and click OK. 13 Click to place the tag. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 16 In the drawing area.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. 12 Click to place the leader arm. You will now change all keynotes to keys only.

Click OK. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number .All items within the selection display in red. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . 17 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Type Selector. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection.Boxed. Select Keynote Tags. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. Click Check None. legends. Creating Details with Revit Architecture. Only the keynotes remain selected.

Place views on drawing sheets. Update drawing sheet and project information. but for training purposes. you will create a sheet. Add labels to a title block. In this lesson. and modify and update the project sheet title block. In this exercise. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. update the project information element properties. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. this tutorial uses imperial units only.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

rvt. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click OK. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. If necessary. In the Project Browser. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). In Revit Architecture. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. scroll until the folder is displayed. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. click Training Files. or in the element properties of the title block.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

8 On the Design Bar. To pan. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. roll the wheel. Click OK. In this tutorial. hold down the wheel and drag.4 Type ZR. click Modify to clear the selection. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. For Name. 9 In the Project Browser. enter A602. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. To zoom in and out. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. you can enter ZE to zoom out.Unnamed. 5 In the drawing area. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. and click Rename. under Sheets(all). right-click A602 . The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. Then. enter Sections/Details. double-click Checker. 6 In the Title Block. Smith and press ENTER. 7 Enter K. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area.

enter J. 17 On the Design Bar. 20 Click and type Project Status. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . select the title block. For Project Name. enter Freighthouse Flats. 16 Type ZR. in the Type Selector. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. select Text : 1/8''. (Left) is selected. 18 On the Options Bar. For Client Name.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 13 Click OK. enter Design Development. The Family Editor opens. For Project Status. click Text. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. 15 In the Options Bar. Smith. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. enter 4/10/2008. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date.

select Label : 3/16''.21 On the Design Bar. add Project Issue Date parameter. click Modify to exit the command. and click OK. as shown. and click. in the Type Selector. click Label. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. click (Load into Project). 22 Using the same method. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. and verify that (Top) are selected. 23 On the Design Bar. under Category Parameters. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. to add 28 Using the same method. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. 29 On the Design Bar. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . as shown. 26 In the Edit Label dialog.

by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . you will create.txt. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. and click Yes. place and modify a keynote legend.Project. representing the view or schedule. for Name. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. Next you will create. click Browse. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. a viewport displays. and under Keynote Table. to a drawing sheet.30 In the Reload Family dialog. for Full Path. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. enter Keynote Legend . Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. In this exercise. select Override parameter values of existing types.

double-click A601 . 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. as shown. clear Show Headers.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. and drag Keynote Legend .Sections/Details. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . on the Appearance tab. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. under Sheets (all). 8 In the Project Browser. expand Legends. under Text.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK.

displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend .Project as shown. The keynote legend is visible. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet.9 Press ESC to clear the selection. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 .

18 In the Element Properties dialog.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. for View Name. 15 In the Project Browser. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. under Legends. at the bottom of the Filter tab. and click OK. as shown. right-click Keynote Legend . enter Keynote Legend . 16 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. click Edit.Sheet.Project. and click OK. and click Properties. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. for Filter. 19 Click OK twice. not keynotes. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . expand Detail Views (Detail). and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. The Keynote Legend is now blank. select Filter by sheet.

expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. as shown.The keynote legend is automatically updated. The view title with line displays below the viewport. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. 2 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all).Title Sheet 1. and then add and update a Drawing list. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. The view remains selected. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. double-click A0 . displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet.

or omit view titles from sheets. You can specify text attributes for view titles.When you place a view on a sheet. Revit Architecture displays a view title. as shown. define the information to include in a view title. 3 In the Type Selector. As part of a construction document set. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. by default. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. The drawing list remains selected. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . expand Schedules/Quantities. 6 Type ZR. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. and zoom in on the drawing list. 5 In the Project Browser. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. Press ESC to clear the selection.

and click OK. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. under Identity Data. clear Appears In Drawing List.Sections/Details and select A801 .Ceiling Plans. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. under Sheets (all). 8 In the Project Browser. The drawing list display is updated. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. right-click the selected sheets. select A602 . while pressing SHIFT. including only sheets that contain views.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 .

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. a curtain wall. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. For example. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. 57 . Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. a central service core. If the grid moves. it is good practice to test the constraints.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. the wall or column will move with it. As you develop the building design. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. After the beginning exercises.

In the drawing area in the right pane. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. 3 Under Template file. you design inside the elevation markers. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. Creating the Project In this exercise. levels. but contains no geometry. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .rte. select Project. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. The new project opens. and settings. click New. South. To create the project file. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. such as a door or window. construction. and customize the project as necessary. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. with an RVT extension. East. and click Browse. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. views. In practice. click Training Files. under Projects. you will use the default template. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. verify that the second option is selected. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. under Create new. 5 Click OK. notice four elevation markers. locate the Project Browser. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. you load any required family type that is not in your project.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. you use a template that is provided with the software. The project is stored as a single file. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. In views that display elevation markers. 2 In the New Project dialog. and residential. West. from the product library. For this project.

The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. You can add. and on the General tab. Ceiling Plans. and elevation views created in the project by the template. such as schedules and legends. you will want to save your work frequently. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. notice the Legends. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). content and building model reports. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. the view you see in the drawing area. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. enter Revit Retail Building. Two level lines. and Elevations (Building Elevation). Groups. then expand Floor Plans. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. created by the template. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model.rvt) is selected. Creating the Project | 59 . 7 If necessary. Families.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. 10 In the Project Browser. Schedules/Quantities. 15 For Save as type. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. and duplicate levels. As you design and document your building model. These views are customizable: you can rename them. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. reflected ceiling plan views. expand Views (all). schedules. and delete them. 13 In the file window. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. 16 Click Save. verify that Project Files (*. 8 Under Floor Plans. change their properties. sheets. NOTE If you create a project without a template. as well as change their names. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). Sheets (all).The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. display in the south elevation. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. double-click Metric. double-click South. will be accessible from the Project Browser. duplicate them. heights. and families in your project. view the Save reminder interval. and other properties. delete. 14 For File name. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. and click Training Files.

so that when one level moves. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . or constrained. the other levels move and change with it. enter 00 Foundation. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. and windows within the building model. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text.17 Proceed to the next exercise. to each other. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. doors. and press ENTER. Adding Project Levels on page 60. and double-click South. expand Views (all). TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. You learn how the levels are locked. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. When you begin designing. After you modify the two default levels. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. You change the names of the 2 default levels.

verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. and click OK. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. and click Basics. Adding Project Levels | 61 . When you add the new level. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. and press ESC. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. and press ENTER. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. By default. enter -1800. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. and then move it up.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. 13 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. 16 Enter 3750. not all the tabs are visible. which should display by default. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. If it does not. right-click. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. and press ENTER. view the Design Bar. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. As you move the cursor. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. click Level. enter 0. 14 Click Plan View Types. Next. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. 5 In the Project Browser. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. enter 01 Entry Level. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. This is the Options Bar.

and move it slightly upward. and enter 02 Level. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. and rename the corresponding views. enter 3750. 25 Click to place the level line. 21 In the Project Browser. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. 26 Press ESC. using a different option. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. click Rename. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. or on the Design Bar. right-click Level 3. you add another level. Next. under Floor Plans. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. 19 Click OK. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. 23 On the Options Bar. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. If you create a level by copying it. click (Pick Lines). click Level. and for Offset.18 In the Project Browser. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. click Modify to end the command.

Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. the levels are no longer constrained. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. Adding Project Levels | 63 . If you select a level and click its lock. all the levels move. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that by moving the top level. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. and you can move them independently. Creating a Column Grid on page 64.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. as shown. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line.

you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. In a later exercise. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. select (Draw). you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. When the grid is complete. double-click 00 Foundation. so that if the roof elevation changes. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. Move the cursor up. On the Design Bar. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. specify a start point for the grid line. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. and specify the grid line endpoint. the column height changes as well. click Grid. 3 On the Options Bar. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. In the following exercise. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Modify. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. By using the grid to control the placement of columns.

and click to place the line.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. enter 4500 mm. and click to place the line. Click to place the grid line. click Grid. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. for Offset. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. Next. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. On the Options Bar. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. and press ENTER. for Offset. Enter A. enter 7500 mm. and click to place the line. enter 7500 mm. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . On the Options Bar. and for Offset. click (Pick Lines). Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B.

Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm.8 Press ESC. click Grid. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. and specify the grid line endpoint. click Grid. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. as shown. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. select grid lines C and 3. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. click Dimension. 14 On the Options Bar. click Dimension.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. click (Aligned). 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. 21 Press ESC twice. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . 15 Starting with grid line A. 18 On the Design Bar. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. 22 While pressing CTRL. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line.

click . 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. enter 50mm. (Element Properties). until it is closer to grid line A. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 6. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. 24 Press ESC. until it is closer to grid line 5. select grid line 5. click the value for Center Segment. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. 29 In the Name dialog. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. Two pins display on the grid lines. At the left endpoint of the grid line. click and drag the blue circular grip up. click Duplicate. click Modify. and press ESC. 26 In the drawing area. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. and click OK. 33 On the Design Bar.5mm Bubble with Gap. and press ESC. and select None. 32 Click OK twice. If necessary. The pins are hidden. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. and on the Options Bar. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. By pinning these central grid lines. 31 For End Segments Length. click Modify. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. and select grid line A. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Edit/New.

37 Select the grid lines again.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. select Grid : 6. and press ESC. 36 On the Design Bar. The original continuous grid lines are restored. click Structural Column. 35 In the Type Selector. click (Grid Intersection). select Grid : 6.5mm Bubble. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden.5mm Bubble with Gap. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. click Modify. select all of the grid lines. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). and in the Type Selector. click Finish. For Place By. and on the Options Bar.

45 While pressing CTRL. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. Next. double-click 01 Entry Level. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. and unlock it. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 47 Enter 9000. under Floor Plans. and press ENTER. If it is unlocked. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. 52 On the Options Bar. select 01 Entry Level. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. lock it. click Activate Dimensions. 48 On the Standard toolbar. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. 46 On the Options Bar. 43 Press ESC. for From. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. select grid line A.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid.

and click to place the target point of the camera. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns. Creating a Column Grid | 71 . The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A.

and click Rename. Adding Beams In this exercise. expand 3D Views. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. Right-click 3D View 1. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. and click OK. and then copy them to subsequent levels. The current view. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. under Views (all). In the Rename View dialog. displays in bold under 3D Views. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. Adding Beams on page 72.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . enter To Building. named 3D View 1 by default. When you finish adding beams.

the icon on the right side of the scale. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. select each grid line. click Finish. 6 In the Type Selector. Adding Beams | 73 . click Beam. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. under 3D Views. 9 On the Options Bar. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. 4 Click Medium. double-click 01 Entry Level. click (Create Beam On Grid). 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. 8 While pressing CTRL. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. 10 In the Project Browser. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . view the icons on the View Control Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. The view is currently set to Coarse. The selected grid lines display as red. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected.

click Modify. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select 02 Level. under Floor Plans. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. and click Select All Instances. right-click. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. double-click 01 Entry Level. click (Default 3D View).Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. 12 On the View toolbar. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. press and hold SHIFT. and click OK. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. 14 Select one of the beams. select 06 Roof. 13 On the Design Bar.

(Element Properties). double-click To Building. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. 21 With the column selected. Adding Beams | 75 . view the Top Level parameter. under Constraints. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. and click Element Properties. select 06 Roof. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. All of the columns display as red. and if necessary. right-click. 06 Roof. 22 On the Options Bar. and click OK. under Instance Parameters. under 3D Views. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. click 24 Press ESC. When you created the columns. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. 25 In the Project Browser. resize the view to see the entire structure. for Top Level. 20 Click Cancel. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level.to the 5th level. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Select All Instances.

Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. double-click South. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. 28 Save the drawing. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . as lines only. under Elevations. but you want to display them in less detail. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area.

and press ESC to end the command. To better add the braces to the structure. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. you create 8 framing elevation views. Adding Braces on page 77. Adding Braces | 77 . Adding Braces In this exercise.29 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. click Framing Elevation. 3 On the Options Bar. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid.

and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. 7 On the Design Bar. After you add the final brace. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. click Brace. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. 11 Using the same technique. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. press ESC twice. and when the endpoint snap displays. click to specify the start point of the brace. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. 8 In the Type Selector. The associated framing elevation view displays. but when placed the braces are placed. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. double-click the elevation marker arrow.

Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. The height of the roof lowers. and press ENTER. enter 18000 mm.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. Adding Braces | 79 . delete it and redraw it. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level.

16 On the bottom right side of the grid. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. and press ENTER. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. 14 On the Standard toolbar. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. but this time add them from right to left. under Floor Plans.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. enter 10000 mm. double-click 00 Foundation.

enter 12000 mm. Adding Braces | 81 . and on the Options Bar. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. click Activate Dimensions. 21 Select grid line A. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. under Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation. 19 In the Project Browser. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. and press ENTER. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). 23 In the Project Browser. as shown in the 3D view below. NOTE As you add braces. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views.

lock it. Creating a Foundation on page 82. beams. double-click South. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. 26 In the Project Browser. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. grid size. under Elevations. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. Test connectivity of the columns. 29 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. double-click {3D}. under Floor Plans. click and roof height. 28 On the Standard toolbar. and if necessary. under 3D Views. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Creating a Foundation In this exercise.24 In the Project Browser. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. 31 Save the drawing. and drag it away from the structure.

and how to load specific families into a project. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. for View Range.Before you can add the pile caps. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project.rfa. and click View Properties. and expand Structural Foundations. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. In the View Range dialog. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and drag it to the drawing area. Click OK twice. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. After you load the pile cap family. Creating a Foundation | 83 . expand Families. 9 Close the warning dialog. click Training Files. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. The pile cap has been added in the view. under View Depth. The foundation pile cap now displays. select Unlimited. double-click 00 Foundation. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. for Level. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. In the Element Properties dialog. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. and press ESC twice. A warning displays. click Edit. under Extents.

Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. and click Create Similar. press ESC twice. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. 13 In the Project Browser. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . When the final pile cap is placed. under 3D Views. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation.

It is not available in a perspective or camera view. beams. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . and click Select All Instances. click Training Files. All columns in the building model display as red. double-click {3D}. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and brace families into the project. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. and braces that you used to create the building structure. you change the types of the columns. under 3D Views. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. right-click. 2 Select one of the columns. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available.14 Close the file with or without saving it. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. beam.rvt. You load new column.

11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. click Edit/New. 15 In the Project Browser. The brace type changes. click (Element Properties). click (Default 3D View). 14 In the Type Properties dialog.3 In the Type Selector. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. 6 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. under Dimensions. 7 On the Design Bar. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. 10 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Name dialog. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. enter 75mm. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. click Modify. and click OK twice. right-click. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only.5CHS. the braces as well as the beams change.2X101. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 4 On the Design Bar. click Brace. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. but it is the only size of its type currently available. This not the size that you want to use. 16 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Selector.6X15. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). for Type. and changing its size parameter. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. 17 While pressing CTRL. select the braces in the elevation one by one. In the following steps. 18 In the Type Selector. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. for d. double-click Elevation 1-a. you change the brace type.9. and click Select All Instances. click Modify. The building model displays the round hollow columns. enter 75mm.

click Training Files. 3 Under Positioning. Linking the Structural Model | 87 .rvt. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. select m_RRB_structure_complete. Linking the Structural Model on page 87. and click Open. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Auto . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise.rvt. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. After the files are linked. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model.Origin to Origin. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

select the linked Revit model. 6 In the drawing area. Grids. and walls could also be copy/monitored. select Levels 00 through 06. and click Select Link.4 In the Project Browser. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. 5 On the Tools toolbar. double-click South. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. while pressing CTRL. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. click (Copy/Monitor). you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select Multiple. depending on the project. In this case. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. however. click Copy. under Elevations. 8 On the Options Bar. After the link is established. 9 In the drawing area. structural members.

delete the Level 2 floor plan.10 On the Options Bar. right-click Level 1. while pressing SHIFT. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. 13 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. First. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . 18 Using the same method. click Finish mode. and click Delete. 16 Click OK. click Finish. for Floor Plan views. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. under Floor Plans. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. 15 In the New Plan dialog. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. click OK.

right-click. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. 21 In the drawing area. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 20 In the drawing area. right-click. select the Topography : Surface. 25 In the View Templates dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.19 In the Project Browser. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. for Name. under Floor Plans. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 24 In the New View Template dialog. and click OK. double-click 00 Foundation. enter Floor Plans. click OK. 26 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.

under Names. select Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. 34 In the 3D view that displays. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Camera. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. double-click Site. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. Linking the Structural Model | 91 .

Adding Floors In this exercise. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. and railings are also created from sketches. Some other Revit Architecture elements. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. click Training Files. right-click 3D View 1.35 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. stairs. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 36 In the Rename View dialog. Adding Floors on page 92. In this exercise. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. enter To Building. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and click Rename. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. such as roofs.rvt. To create floors. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK.

click (Rectangle). Do not lock the dimension. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. select the top floor line. Leave this dimension unlocked. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. If the grid changes size. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. Move the cursor to the left.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. and then the first horizontal grid line. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. On the Sketch tab. You are now in the Sketch Editor. click Dimension. click Lines. under Floor Plans. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. past the first vertical grid line. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Floor. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. and elements in the current view display as gray. At the top left corner of the grid. Adding Floors | 93 .

At the top left corner of the grid. They display on the floor sketch. and then press ESC. click Modify. and change their values to 300 mm. Select and lock the dimensions. Enter 300. Do not lock the dimensions. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. press ENTER. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. select the top floor line. ■ 7 On the Design Bar.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. Move the cursor to the left dimension. and click the temporary dimension value.

Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. click Edit. and on the Options Bar. on the Design Bar. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. click Quit Sketch. click Lines. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay.8 Select the floor. and press ESC. On the Sketch tab. and for Offset. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. On the Options Bar. and lock the dimensions. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. enter 1500mm. Select the three remaining floor lines. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. under Floor Plans. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click (Pick Lines). You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. double-click 02 Level. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. Next. click Floor. Adding Floors | 95 . This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. using a different sketching technique. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines.

20 On the Tools toolbar. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. 16 On the Design Bar. double-click 03 Level. click (Rectangle). and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. Click the locks to constrain the floors. click Floor. 18 On the Options Bar. click (Align). The 02 Level floor displays. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. and a lock icon displays. 14 On the Design Bar. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. 17 On the Sketch tab.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. under Floor Plans. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. click Lines. click Finish Sketch. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

24 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Edit. and on the Options Bar. Adding Floors | 97 . 33 At the top left corner of the grid. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. and click OK. double-click {3D}. select 05 Roof Garden. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. 35 On the Sketch tab. and lock the edges. 31 In the Project Browser. 32 Select the floor. double-click 01 Entry Level. Alternatively. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. under Views ➤ 3D Views. under Floor Plans. click Finish Sketch. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. double-click 05 Roof Garden. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. under Floor Plans.

click to place the roof line. ■ ■ For Offset. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. 3 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. enter 1800 mm. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line.rvt. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. To create the roof. Click (Pick Lines). click Lines. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. When a blue dashed line displays. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and press ENTER. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. Adding a Roof on page 98. click Training Files. double-click 06 Roof. Adding a Roof In this exercise.

8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). Adding a Roof | 99 . enter 300 mm. for Offset. 7 On the Options Bar.6 Select grid line 5. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). and when the blue dashed line displays. click to place the roof line.

Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). click (Trim/Extend). click Finish Roof. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. ■ 12 On the Design Bar.10 Press ESC. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. select the roof.

16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. enter -100 mm. 15 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the section. move the cursor down below the roof. click Section. click Modify. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. Adding a Roof | 101 . 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. for Elevation.14 On the Options Bar. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. click (Add new points to the slab shape). on grid D.

for Structure. click Edit/New. 24 In the Project Browser. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. select the roof. under Floor Plans. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. double-click 06 Roof. for Structure [1]. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. (Element Properties). select Variable. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Modify.20 On the Design Bar. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. under Construction. and on the Options Bar. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 30 Click OK 3 times. In section. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes.Roof Edge. click OK. select Fascia : Fascia . 37 If necessary. 40 In the Type Selector. 38 In the 3D view. moving counter-clockwise. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. 41 Starting with the left front edge. on the View Control Bar. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. Adding a Roof | 103 . 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window.31 On the Design Bar. select the section line. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. zoom in to the roof. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 33 In the warning dialog. click Modify. In this case. and press DELETE. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. select each edge. click (Default 3D View).

View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. double-click To Building. under 3D Views. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. you add a curtain wall. the curtain wall resizes with it. click Modify.42 On the Design Bar. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . so if you resize the grid.

and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Name dialog. for Spacing. Click OK twice.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Floor Plans. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . When you duplicate a type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. for Type. The type is saved in the project. for Join Condition. 3 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. enter Retail Storefront. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. Under Construction. select 01 Entry Level. and click OK. click Wall. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Edit/New. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. For Height. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. For Offset. for Spacing. click to place the first curtain wall segment. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). enter 600 mm. For Level. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. and move it slightly toward the building interior. click Training Files.rvt. enter 1050 mm. click 01 Entry Level. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 2100 mm. select 05 Roof Garden. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type.

click Dimension. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. and trim each curtain wall segment. under 3D Views. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. double-click To Building. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. and lock the dimensions. 13 On the Design Bar. click (Trim/Extend). verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. you can delete the dimensions. so they remain in the view. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. 15 On the View Control Bar. If you want to hide them. These dimensions are not in a sketch. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. If the grid moves. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. Creating an Entrance on page 107. Creating an Entrance | 107 . click Training Files.rvt. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass.

and double-click South. Do not select Columns.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View Control Bar. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. as these usually represent internal pilasters. and click None. under the element list. 4 On the Model Categories tab. clear one element to clear all the elements. All the elements in the list are selected. 7 Click OK. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 5 Under Visibility. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. click All. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. under Views (all). expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 6 Under Visibility. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . To better work with the curtain wall panels.

18 On the View Control Bar. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. Creating an Entrance | 109 .9 On the Design Bar. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. 12 With the panels selected. and click OK. 17 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. under 3D Views. double-click {3D}. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. in this case an architectural elevation. 16 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. press and hold CTRL. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. click Modify. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. in the Type Selector. select System Panel : Solid. select Architectural Elevation. 10 Select 1 panel. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. click Detail Level ➤ Medium.

110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Elevations (Building Elevation).19 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. double-click South. 20 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 21 Zoom to the front of the building.

29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. select One Segment. 27 On the Options Bar. click Curtain Grid. and unpin it. 32 In the Type Selector. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. select another mullion to the right. and click to select it. 30 On the Design Bar.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. 24 On the Options Bar. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). click Modify. Creating an Entrance | 111 . click Add or Remove Segments. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

35 Zoom in to the front of the building.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. select it. press TAB until it is selected. and view the new entrance. 36 Zoom in to the first panel. and unpin it. click (Default 3D View). 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 34 On the View toolbar.

41 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. remove the mullions from the 2nd. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 39 Using the same process. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 .38 Press DELETE. and 4th panels. 3rd. open the North elevation. 40 Optionally.

rvt. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Graphics. and click View Properties. double-click 01 Entry Level. 3 Right-click in the view. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. under Floor Plans. select 02 Level. 5 Click OK. for Underlay. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser.

and click Rename. under Floor Plans.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. select the grip closest to the callout head. enter Display Area. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. 8 Select the callout. 9 In the Project Browser. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. and click OK. The cursor changes to a pencil. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. 10 In the Rename View dialog. click Callout. and click to complete the callout. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . which indicates you must draw the callout.

right-click. as shown. 14 Press ESC. 16 Select the section box. click Section. 12 Draw a section line. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. and click Flip Section.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 13 Select the section line. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level.

22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. click (Align).135mm Partition (2-hr). Lock both alignments. click Dimension. Click (Rectangle). and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. For Loc Line. and click OK. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. select Finish Face: Exterior. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . select Wall faces. 25 Press ESC twice. right-click Section 1. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector.17 In the Project Browser. click Wall. select Basic Wall : Interior . expand Sections (Building Section). under Floor Plans. 26 On the Design Bar. for Prefer. 18 In the Rename View dialog. 27 On the Options Bar. enter Section Display Area. double-click 01 Entry Level.

) 36 Press ESC twice. under Sections (Building Section). 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. double-click Section Display Area. 32 In the Type Selector. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. under Ceiling Plans. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Ceiling. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. Next. 38 On the View Control Bar. and lock the dimension. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. and lock the dimension.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. 37 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level.

click Modify. and click OK. click Attach.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. 46 Press ESC. double-click Section Display Area. 43 On the Design Bar. click (Element Properties). 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. click to select it. and press ESC. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. 41 On the Options Bar. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. On the Options Bar. enter 2700 mm. enter 2700 mm. Select the 02 Level Floor. for Top/Base. double-click 01 Entry Level. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. under Sections. under Constraints. under Ceiling Plans. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. for Height Offset From Level. and click to select the walls. and click OK. under Constraints. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . and click (Element Properties). for Base Offset. 47 In the Project Browser. press TAB until you select the wall chain. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to select the walls.

55 In the Type Properties dialog. for Structure. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. for Type. view the ceiling structure. 58 On the Edit toolbar. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Edit/New. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Rotate). click Edit. and click . click Cancel. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Ceiling Plans. 54 Click OK.49 In the Project Browser. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. under Construction. click Cancel. double-click 01 Entry Level.

61 Press ESC. and press ENTER. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . enter 45. 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid.60 Click.

click Shadows On. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 65 On the View Control Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. click Shadows Off. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 64 On the View Control Bar. double-click To Building. 66 Optionally. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels.

Move the cursor over grid line B. and click to create a reference plane to the right. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . 3 On the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level.rvt. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. click Training Files. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. and click to create a reference plane to the left. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. enter 1500 mm. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). click Ref Plane. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and copy it to the 05 Level. under Floor Plans.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and for Offset. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

shorten the right reference plane. and specify a point to create first stair flight. and 3. 2. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 7 Using the same method. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. click Stairs.5 On the Design Bar. 6 Select the left reference plane. C. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. click Modify. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B.

select Finish Face: Interior. beyond the end of the stair. select Basic Wall : Generic . and select the 2nd reference plane. click Wall. 10 On the Options Bar.225mm Masonry. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. and specify a point. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor down. including its handrails. 12 In the Type Selector. ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. The complete stair displays. Click (Rectangle). Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain.

enter 1200 mm. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. Select the bottom of the stair. Lock the dimension. select the dimension value. and press ENTER. click Align. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and specify a point away from the wall. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing.15 On the Tools toolbar. select Wall faces. Select the wall. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. click Dimension. and lock the alignment. and click to select it. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Select the interior face of the wall. Click Modify. 18 Using the same technique. for Prefer. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall.

and press DELETE. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. click Door. select both reference planes. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. and press DELETE. 28 On the Options Bar. (Undo). The stair and walls move to the left. TIP To flip the door swing. 25 While pressing CTRL. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. 27 In the Type Selector. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm.21 Select the dimension. clear Tag on Placement. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. a warning displays. 23 Select the stair. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . 24 On the Standard toolbar. Because the dimension is constrained.

click Modify. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. under Floor Plans. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. (SteeringWheels). 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 44 On the Tools toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. select 00 Foundation. For Top Constraint. select all 4 walls. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs.30 On the Design Bar. click Align. Click OK. click 36 On the View toolbar. select 05 Roof Garden. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. Click OK. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. for Multistory Top Level. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. 33 Select the stair. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Under Constraints. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. and move the cursor to spin the building model. for Base Constraint. 35 On the View toolbar. but if you view the top level of the building. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. (Default 3D View). and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). (Rectangle). (Element Properties). verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties).

Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden.46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. and lock the alignments. click (Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels). and lock the alignment. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. on the View toolbar. and click OK. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. click see the roof. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft.

Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). Under Constraints. under Floor Plans. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. For Top Constraint. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest.55 In the Project Browser. click 59 On the View toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. 56 Select the shaft. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. By offsetting the base. enter 300 mm. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . (SteeringWheels). ■ 58 On the View toolbar. (Default 3D View). and click OK. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. for Base Offset. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor.

for Underlay. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . and click OK. under Graphics. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Wall. under Floor Plans.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View Properties. 2 Right-click in the view. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. select 06 Roof.

5 In the Type Selector. 17 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. click Lines. enter 9750. select Elevation: South. and press ENTER. and then select the right face of the wall. click (Align). 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. The exact placement is not important. click . You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3.225mm Masonry. and on the Options Bar. Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. 15 In the error dialog. click Edit Profile. 7 On the Tools toolbar. and click Open View. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Remove Constraints. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. 16 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. 11 In the Go To View dialog. select Basic Wall : Generic . and click (Fillet arc).

Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . under 3D Views. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. and click (Circle). double-click {3D}. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. click Finish Sketch. as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. click . as shown: 19 On the Options Bar.18 In the upper right corner of the profile. 22 In the Project Browser. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner.

24 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views.

move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . double-click 05 Roof Garden.4. 5 On the Basics tab. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and press ESC twice. click Training Files. TIP After you place the 1st planter. 6 In the Type Selector. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. as shown. select Planter : 1220 x 1220. between grid lines C and D.5 Meters.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Floor Plans. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . select M_RPC Tree . Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. click Component. click Component. 3 In the Type Selector. and open Metric\m_RRB_host.

select the 2 remaining trees. and in the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Dimensions. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 11 Select one of the trees. click Duplicate. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. enter Japanese Cherry 1. for Type. click Lines. 21 On the Design Bar. 17 While pressing CTRL. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 14 In the Name dialog. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. enter 2400 mm. click Edit/New.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1.5 Meters. and then click OK twice. View the roof. double-click {3D}. 10 In the Project Browser. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. select M_RPC Tree .5 Meters. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. for Height. 16 Click Apply. 18 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level.8 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. click Floor. as shown. click (Default 3D View). 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under 3D Views. (Element Properties). For Offset. under Floor Plans. enter 1500 mm.

enter 0 mm. 25 Using the same method. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. and click to sketch a line. 26 On the Options Bar. 28 Select the right vertical floor line. and click to place the line.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. click (Draw). 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . 29 On the Options Bar. for Offset. and click to sketch a line.

and click to finish the line. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. clear Chain. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. and click to finish the line. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. move the cursor up 900 mm.30 On the Options Bar. click (Trim/Extend). 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 32 Press ESC. 34 On the Tools toolbar. 35 Select the line that you just drew. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5.

enter -250 mm. and click so he is facing the column. enter Sidewalk. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 Click OK. In plan view. 43 Click OK twice. 48 In the Type Selector. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . for Type. click Component. 49 On the Options Bar. When you render an image. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. under Constraints. near Column E5. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. 42 In the Name dialog. and on the Options Bar. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. click Duplicate. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk.38 On the Design Bar. a photorealistic image displays. select Rotate after placement. The completed sidewalk displays. 39 Select the sidewalk. as shown: (Element Properties). for Height Offset from Level. select M_RPC Male : Alex. click Edit/New. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. Next. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees.

and place it along the sidewalk behind him. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .NOTE If necessary. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. click Camera. click the car. 56 Press ESC twice. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. and click to place her on the sidewalk. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. about 30 degrees. 52 In the Type Selector. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. select M_RPC Beetle. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. 54 In the Type Selector. and click (Element Properties). and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1).

65 Click the sidewalk. under Constraints. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. and on the Options Bar. for Offset. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. double-click To Building. 60 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. and click OK. Next. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . enter -300 mm. and on the Options Bar. 63 Click the sidewalk. 66 Using the same method. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. click Pick Host. double-click West. If the sidewalk changes height. click Pick Host. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. under 3D Views. 64 Select Alex. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. When you select a host for a component.59 In the Element Properties dialog.

and replace them with a service core. After the service core is positioned. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. 68 Proceed to the next exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

walls. click (Default 3D View). 4 Press DELETE. including the stairs. under Floor Plans. double-click 05 Roof Garden.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . (SteeringWheels). In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. 3 Select the entire stairwell. click 6 On the View toolbar. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. and shaft opening. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the View toolbar. click Training Files. you delete the entire stairwell.

Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. and click Create Instance. click OK.rvt. double-click 01 Entry Level. and zoom in to the linked instance. under Floor Plans. 13 In the drawing area. expand Model. and on the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 10 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. click Modify. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. right-click m_RRB_core. expand Groups. under Floor Plans. and notice that the linked file is listed. click (Align). and open Metric\m_RRB_core.

or if the group layout is expected to change. and click to align the center. 20 On the View toolbar. 19 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ Click grid line C. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. click Modify. (SteeringWheels). click (top down view).16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. click Modify. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . 18 Select the core. and on the Options Bar. click 21 On the View toolbar. (Default 3D View). click Ungroup. 17 On the Design Bar. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed.

After you modify it. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. click Training Files. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . In the left pane of the Open dialog. where it is hosted within a railing family.rvt. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. You copy the railing type into your project from another project.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. you add glass railings around the floor edges. 22 Proceed to the final exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 .Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. in the Project Browser. 5 Expand Railing. click OK.rvt. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. double-click 02 Level. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. and select Glass. under Floor Plans. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. press and hold CTRL. and Parapet. 8 In the Project Browser. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. and open Metric\m_Conference. click Training Files. and expand Railings. 3 In the Conference project. expand Renderings. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. The rendering displays.rvt. Handrail only. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. expand Families. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 13 On the Tools toolbar. and click to split the floor. and on the Options Bar. and double-click Lounge Perspective. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. click (Split). 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. click Edit. The floor sketch displays.

verify that Chain is not selected.15 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click Modify. and click to draw another line. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. click (Align). 23 Complete the sketch as shown. and click to place it. 25 Select grid line B. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. 18 On the Design Bar. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. and on the Options Bar. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. and click to draw another line. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B.

This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 30 On the Design Bar. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).rvt project. 29 On the Design Bar. click Railing. for Type. For Offset.26 Select grid line D. select Glass. and lock the alignment. click Railing Properties. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. 27 On the Tools toolbar. click (Align). 33 On the Design Bar. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. Lock the dimensions. 31 In the Revit dialog. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 100 mm. click Dimension. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown.

click Camera. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. click Dimension. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 39 Click Finish Sketch.37 On the Design Bar.

42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view. You can view the railing that you just added.

152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .43 Close all project drawings.

and a roof garden. 153 . a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. exterior fire stairs. NOTE For training purposes.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. slight modifications to the building design have been made. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. lofty ceilings. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. balconies. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units.

154 .

you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. including plan. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. 155 . You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. elevation. how to create section and elevation views. You learn how to create new views from existing views. section. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. you learn how to create views from a building model.

and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. expand Floor Plans.rvt.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

7 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. and click OK. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. under Floor Plans. select Level 2. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. and click OK. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.2 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 9 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename.

right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans. Next. double-click Vicinity Plan. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click the current scale. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 11 Under Floor Plans. and click 1: 1000.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. enter Vicinity Plan. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 14 On the View Control Bar. 12 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 13 In the Project Browser.

you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise.rvt. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 16 Right-click.

160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Elevation: Building Elevation.rvt. click Elevation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. select 1:100. double-click Level 1. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. for Scale. 3 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry.

and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. click Modify. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 . 8 On the Design Bar.

under Views (all). Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. click Section. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 11 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. under Elevations. ■ Move the cursor down. enter South East. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Options Bar. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. for Scale. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 14 In the Type Selector. and double-click Level 1. double-click South East. select 1:100. select Section: Building Section. under Elevations (Building Elevation).

Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 . 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.

20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click to place it. click Split Segment. Click the midpoint of the section line.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 23 On the View Control Bar. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. and double-click Section 1. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . using the blue circular drag grip. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. expand Sections (Building Section).21 On the Design Bar. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. 24 Select gridline F. click Modify.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. To create each view. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view.25 On the Design Bar. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view.

for Scale. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. Creating Callout Views | 167 . select Floor Plan.Resulting callout view .Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. double-click Level 1. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. under Floor Plans.rvt. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. 4 On the Options Bar. select 1:50. click Callout.

168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and select the callout boundary. ■ Select the middle grip. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. click Modify.6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line.

Creating Callout Views | 169 . 14 On the Options Bar. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. under Sections (Building Sections).7 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. select Detail View: Detail. 9 In the Rename View dialog. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. double-click Section 1. and click OK. click Modify. click Callout. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. select 1:50. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. for Scale.

170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .■ Move the cursor diagonally down. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 16 Modify the callout leader as shown.

enter Roof Overhang Detail. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. Creating Callout Views | 171 . and click OK. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. 18 In the Rename View dialog. under Detail Views (Details). 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. expand Detail Views (Details).17 In the Project Browser.

2 Click File menu ➤ Open. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. the elevation markers.rfa.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. select Custom-Section Head. under Floor Plans. open Metric\Families\Annotations.rvt. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. double-click Level 1. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Training Files. You change the appearance of the section mark head.

enter 12. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. click Duplicate.5mm Square. 4 On the Design Bar. enter Section Head – Custom.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. scroll to Section Line. 22 In the Name dialog. Section Tail . select the current project. and select 3. and click OK. and click OK. 10 On the floor plan. 17 Under Category. 21 In the Type Properties dialog.Custom. scroll to Section Marks. select the section line. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. 19 Click OK. 15 Under Category. and can be applied to the section line. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 8 In the Name dialog. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . click Load into Project. Section Tail – Filled. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab. and select 2. select Section Head . for Section Head. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. clear any others. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. and click OK twice. and click OK.Filled. . and click OK. On the floor plan. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. 12 For Section Tag.

31 In the Load into Projects dialog. for Elevation Tag. select Custom-Callout Head. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. clear all others. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. and click Open. For Dimensions ➤ Width. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. select 12. 39 Click OK twice. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. click Edit/New. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 34 In the Name dialog. select the current project. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. . and on the Options Bar. For Corner Radius. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. 40 Press ESC. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags.5 mm. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. enter 6 mm. For Line Weight. Click OK. notice the square elevation markers that display.5mm Square. select the callout. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. open Metric\Families\Annotations.23 In the Type Properties dialog. for Callout Tag. select Square.rfa. enter 12. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. select 3. Click OK. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click Load into Project. . and click OK. 36 In the drawing. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. 27 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. On the floor plan. click Duplicate. and on the Options Bar.

expand Callout Boundary. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. select Dash.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click the Annotation Objects tab. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. 43 Under Category. 45 For Line Pattern. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. view regions. masking regions. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. scroll down to Callout Boundary. 49 Click OK. and select 4. You learn to create view templates. and visual overrides. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. 46 Under Category. filters. and select 7.

Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. 6 On the View Toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG.rvt. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . To accomplish this.Creating a View Template In this exercise. click Zoom to Fit. click (Hide Crop Region). 5 On the View Control Bar. under Elevations. and apply it to multiple elevation views. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. The crop region displays as red. click Training Files. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. click (Show Crop Region). and double-click East. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. 2 On the View Control Bar. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser.

levels. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. 13 On the View Control bar. grids. Creating a View Template | 177 . click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. under Visibility. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. Callouts. elevation markers. clear Entourage. 11 Under Visibility. and section lines are now hidden in the view. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

and click OK. and click Create View Template From View. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. 15 In the New View Template dialog. double-click North. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. right-click North. and click Apply View Template. 18 In the Project Browser. right-click East.rvt. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. click OK.14 In the Project Browser. click Apply. under Elevations. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. 17 In the Project Browser. 16 In the View Templates dialog. 20 Using the same method. under Elevations. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. edit the crop region as before.

for View Range. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK twice. select Level Below (Level 4). for Bottom. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. 2 In the Project Browser. for Level. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Under View Depth.rvt. select Penthouse. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. click Edit. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Level Below (Level 4).View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. right-click. double-click Penthouse. under Floor Plans. under Extents. and click Properties.

for Bottom. and click Properties. under Floor Plans. select Roof Plan. select Level 4. double-click Roof Plan. right-click. for View Range. for Level. 6 In the Project Browser. click Edit.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. Click OK twice. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Extents. select Level 4. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Under View Depth.

11 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. Move you cursor diagonally. click Finish Sketch. Under View Depth. under Extents. 10 On the Design Bar. select Unlimited. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). for Level. click Edit. Click OK twice. click Region Properties. for Bottom. In the left corner of the building. click Plan Region. 16 On the Design Bar. select Unlimited. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. for View Range. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 .Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. click Lines.

17 On the Design Bar.rvt. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click the Filters tab. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. in this case. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. After you apply the filter. under Views (all). the fire rating of the walls. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

5 In the Filters dialog. 11 Select Rated Walls. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. under Projection/Surface. under Categories. select Fire Rating. 7 In the Filters dialog. and click OK. 12 On the Filter tab. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . and click OK. under Basic colors. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click OK. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. for Color. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. click Edit/New. 9 Click OK. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. Enter Hr. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. select Walls. and click OK. 17 Using the same method. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. select the red color. 10 On the Filter tab. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. for Pattern. click <No Override>. enter Rated Walls. select Solid Fill. and apply a color. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. for Rated Walls. click Remove. under Filters. click OK. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click Override under Patterns.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Add. 14 In the Color dialog. 16 Click OK. click (New). Select contains. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog.

To accomplish this.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you obscure geometry in portions of a view. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise.

5 On the View menu. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 7 On the View menu. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. 11 In the Type Selector. 8 Select the crop region. and click Rename. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 4 On the View Control Bar. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. click Show Crop Region. click Masking Region.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. right-click. as shown. select Invisible lines. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. 9 On the View Control Bar.

click Finish Sketch. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .12 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. click (Rectangle). 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. under Visibility. for Pattern. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. under Floor Plans. right-click. under Pattern Overrides. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1.Level 1. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. and click 1: 50. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. click black. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . 11 Click OK twice. select Walls. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.rvt. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Unit 18 Plan . select Solid fill. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click the current scale. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and click Rename. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. right-click. and click OK. and click OK. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. for Color. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 7 Under Cut. and click Override. click <No Override> to apply a color. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click in the Patterns field. 4 On the View Control Bar.

clear Floors. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 16 Under Visibility. under Visibility. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click OK. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Grids.

and click Hide in View ➤ Category.18 Right-click. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 .

27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. for Pattern. click <No Override> to apply a color. under Lines. click Projection Lines. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click. 21 Under Projection/Surface. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default.20 Right-click. click Override. 23 In the Color dialog. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. select Dash. By using the previous method to make the selection. select the sofa. and click OK. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. click a purple color. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 25 Click OK twice. for Color. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category.

28 For Color. right-click. and click OK twice. click By Category Override. 32 Select one of the lamps. click . click Modify. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. 30 On the Design Bar. select a bright green color. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . 29 In the Color dialog. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color.

Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. how to add views to the sheets. click .33 On the View Control Bar. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. click Training Files. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Creating Sheets. right-click.rvt. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. click Sheet. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . and click OK.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View. select A0 metric. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project.

click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). Click OK. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . For Sheet Number. click Modify.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. 5 When the title block highlights. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. For Sheet Name. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. enter A101.Unnamed. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. on the Options Bar. enter Site Plan. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. and select the title block. 7 On the Design Bar.

10 In the Element Properties dialog. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter For Approval. for Project Address. enter J. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 .Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. 14 Click OK. For Client Name. 2009. Smith. click Edit. The new project information displays in the titleblock. MA 12345 12 Click OK. For Project Status. enter Freighthouse Flats. enter 2009-1. For Project Number. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. enter 15 May. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. For Project Name.

right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. select the new sheet name. for Name. and click Rename.Elevations A105 . 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter Floor Plan. and click OK.Elevations A106 . create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . 18 In the Sheet Title dialog.Sections A108 . and click Save. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.Layout Plan A104 .Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps.rvt. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Stairs In the following exercise. right-click. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. you add views to these sheets.Elevations A107 . select A0 metric. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 17 In the Project Browser.

2 In the Project Browser. and click to place the view.Elevations. and click to place it. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Floor Plan. select Level 1. click Modify. and drag it to the sheet. double-click A104 . The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. 4 On the Design Bar. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . The red border around the view no longer displays. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. double-click A102 . under Sheets (all). under Floor Plans. 6 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation).rvt. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all).

11 Under Detail Views (Detail). Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it.Sections. double-click A107 . align it with the East elevation. 12 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Modify. and click to place it. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections).

move the cursor over it. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. . zoom in to the grip. and on the Options Bar. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. and press TAB until it highlights. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. for View Scale. select 1:5. 16 Select title bar. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view.

double-click Level 1. under Sheets (all). 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. double-click A108 . Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet.Stairs. and click to place it. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. 19 On the Design Bar. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 18 Under Floor Plans.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. click Modify. under Floor Plans. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. and click Activate View. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. 5 On the Design Bar. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. double-click A107 . click Modify. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. In order to do this. and press ENTER. and then make changes and deactivate the view.Sections. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . right-click. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. you must first activate the view on the sheet.rvt. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. 2 Select the building section view. enter 16700 mm. under Sheets (all).

and click Deactivate View. 7 In the Project Browser. After you create the sheet. double-click North. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save.6 Right-click. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. You modify the view to hide the view title. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated.rvt. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

enter T. Click OK. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. enter Title Sheet. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click. and click OK.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. click Camera. select the new sheet name. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . 7 Place the camera as shown. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. For Sheet Name. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. select A0 metric. The camera view displays.

click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. double-click T . select Far Clip Active. 14 Under 3D Views. Under Camera. Under Extents. for Eye Elevation.8 On the Options Bar. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 12 On the View Control Bar. 13 In the Project Browser. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. For Target Elevation. enter 18000 mm. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. Click OK. For Far Clip Offset.Title Sheet. under Sheets (all). enter 100000 mm. enter 1500 mm. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. 11 On the View Control Bar.

and then click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. . for Height. under Graphics. enter Viewport/no title mark. enter 635 mm. select Scale (locked proportions). click Edit/New. click Size. 24 Click OK twice. Under Model Crop Size. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . on the Options Bar. click Duplicate. and on the Options Bar. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. and click OK. 19 Select the view on the sheet. click Modify. select No. for Show title. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 On the Design Bar.15 With the view selected. Click Apply. 22 In the Name dialog. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar.

206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and close the exercise file.26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. You also learn to create different types of schedules.rvt. click Training Files. Tagging Objects In this lesson. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. Because of the open style floor plan. 207 . such as room and window schedules. such as doors and windows. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged.Level 1. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise.

as shown: 5 Using the same method. right-click in the Design Bar. move the cursor to the right. and click Room and Area. click Room Separation. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.6 Using the same method. 9 In the Tags dialog. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . 7 On the Design Bar. click Load. click Modify. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area.

13 On the Options Bar.rfa. and click to place the room and tag. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. click OK. type 2400 mm. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. indicating that it can be edited. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 11 In the Tags dialog.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. type U18-1. click Room. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. click it. click Modify. and the rectangle contains the room tag. 14 For Offset. 16 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. verify that Tag on placement is selected. and select the room tag. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. The room tag number displays in blue. click Training Files.

■ 21 On the Design Bar.18 Click the room text label. Dining. and press ENTER. place rooms and tags. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Sequential letters are also supported. 23 Using the same method. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. click Room. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . and press ENTER. click Modify. 22 Click the room text label. type Entry. type Kitchen. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. Click to place the new room and tag.

27 On the Design Bar. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser.Level 2.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. The rooms are already placed. on the Model Categories tab. and click OK. but they need to be tagged. 29 On the Design Bar. double-click Unit 18 Plan . and moving clockwise. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). under Floor Plans. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Modify. click Room Tag. clear Room Separation. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. expand Lines.

expand Floor Plans.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . clear Leader. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. you learn how to place door and window tags. in the Project Browser. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .rvt.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise.Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

type Corridor. for room 101. For 102. next to Rows. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. and press ENTER. click New. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . select Storage. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. For 103. for Name.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. 10 Edit the number to be 101. The room Number is U17-46. and press ENTER. type Building Entry. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. For 105. 101-106. add 5 more rooms. and press ENTER. type Storage. For 104. 11 Using the same method. select Corridor. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially.

select 9. under Floor Plans. 13 Save the file. type Stair. you add room separation lines. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click the bright green swatch. expand Lines. click the Lines field.■ For 106. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 4 Click OK twice. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. In the Line Graphics dialog. click the Color field. click Override. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. For Room Separation. under Projection/Surface. Under Custom colors. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. and press ENTER. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. under Visibility. For Weight. place rooms from a program list. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and modify room names. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.rvt. double-click Level 1. In the Lines field.

9 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. First. click Room. draw the horizontal line. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. click Room Separation.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. click Modify.

type 2400 mm. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Room. select 102 Storage. select 101 Building Entry. for Room.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). 14 For Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Options Bar.

under Floor Plans. double-click Room Schedule. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. 16 Using the same method.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. place the following rooms. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. and zoom in to the Corridor. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. 20 While pressing CTRL. click Modify. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . double-click Level 1. 19 In the Project Browser. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). under Schedules/Quantities. 17 On the Design Bar.

Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. select Rooms. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and Wall Finish. under Available fields. clear Room Bounding. type Units. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click 23 On the Design Bar. 30 On the Options Bar. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. and click OK. select Base Finish. and for all 3 finishes. type As Selected. (Element Properties). 31 For Key Name. under Category. 27 Select Schedule keys. for Rows. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Constraints. click New. click Schedule/Quantities.21 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Floor Finish. and click Add. and click OK. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. while pressing CTRL. 24 Open the Room Schedule.

under Schedules/Quantities. click (Filter Selection). 42 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Units.32 Using the same method. under Other. under Floor Plans. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. click Check None. 37 Open the Room Schedule. and click Add. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. right-click Room Schedule. under Identity Data. for Fields. and click OK. click (Element Properties). select Rooms. 36 Click OK twice. 43 In the Filter dialog. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 33 In the Project Browser. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. select Room Style. for Available fields. for Room Style. click Edit. for Room Style. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . double-click Level 1. 38 Under U17-8. select Units. 44 On the Options Bar. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. and click Properties.

for Name. click 5 For Title. at the warning prompt. and click OK. right-click Level 1. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. click OK. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. select Room Style. and click Properties. select Public. type Room Type. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. click OK. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). For rooms 102 and 105. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. select Service. and double-click Level 1. type Room Type. 48 Save the file. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme.46 Open the Room Schedule. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. 104. (Duplicate). expand Floor Plans. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. 103.rvt. and 106. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. 9 In the Project Browser. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. click the Color Scheme field. for Color. under Views (all). Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Graphics. and apply it to the Level 1 view.

in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 19 On the Options Bar. click Edit Color Scheme. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). When you move the cursor over the drawing area. click the value in the Color column. under Schemes.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. click Edit. click Color Scheme Legend. expand Lines. under Visibility. select the color legend. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. click Modify. 14 Click OK twice. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. clear Visible. and click OK. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . select Room Type. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. and clear Room Separation. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor.

28 Under Title Text. click Modify. and click OK. (Element Properties). click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. type 5 mm. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. type 25 mm. 23 Using the same method. for Size. 24 Click OK. under Graphics. respectively. 30 On the Design Bar.22 In the Color dialog. under Custom color. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Swatch Width. on the Options Bar. select blue. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. 29 Click OK twice.

position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. 35 Click OK twice. under Sections.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. under Sections. click Color Scheme Legend. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Building Section. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. for Color Scheme. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. select Rooms. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Graphics. click Edit. and click OK. and select Properties. right-click Building Section. under Visibility. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. select Room Type.

select Rooms. click . 42 In the Filter dialog. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. select Public. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). 41 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. and click OK. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. for Room Style. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 46 Click . select all the rooms in the stairwell. 45 While pressing CTRL. click Check None. (Filter Selection).40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. for Room Style. select Units. under Identity Data. and click OK. and click OK.

excluding the stairwell spaces. click New. 54 While pressing CTRL. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. type Suites. under Key Name for the new row. for Rows. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Room Style Schedule. 51 On the Options Bar. select Service. under Schedules/Quantities. for Room Style. and click . Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. and click OK. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. under Identity Data. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 .

and click OK. select Areas and Volumes. under Identity Data. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. The color fill extends to the roof. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. select Suites. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select the room on the left side of the top floor. 59 Under Room Area Computation. for Room Style. under Volume Computations. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. verify that At wall finish is selected. The color fill will extend to the roof. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. and click OK.55 Click . but not beyond it.

. select Level 2. 70 For Limit Offset. under Constraints. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. 72 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. and click 65 For Limit Offset. and the living room. select the stairwell room. click Modify. 67 On the first level. 69 In the Element Properties dialog.0. 71 Click OK. 66 Click OK. for Upper Limit. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). the dining room. type 0. select Loft.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. for Upper Limit. type -254 mm. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . 68 Click .

You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. double-click {3D}. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .rvt. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. under 3D Views.73 Save the file. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building.

For Then by. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Material: Description. 5 On the Design Bar. select Roofs. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. Select Grand totals. under Available fields.EPDM. select Family and Type. and click OK. and click Add. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. click Family and Type.Insulation on Plywood Deck . 4 In the Type Selector. 9 Using the same method. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. 3 While pressing CTRL. click Modify. under Category. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. Clear Itemize every instance. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 .

select Material: Cost. under Available fields. select Material: Area. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. click Edit. click Estimated Cost. and click OK twice.40 50. and click Properties. 20 For Formula. click the Formatting tab.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. type Estimated Cost. under Other. Under Field formatting. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. and under Fields. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. select Calculate totals. for Fields. 17 Click Calculated Value. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. and click Add. 23 For Field formatting. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). 19 For Type. 21 Click OK. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Currency. 12 Click OK. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. select Calculate totals. for Name. for Material: Cost.

you create an exiting plan for the building. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. 31 Save the file. 27 In the Format dialog. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . 28 For Unit symbol. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. These shared parameters can be added to any family. The cost fields are formatted correctly. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. and schedule the total distance of each path. and are defined and stored in an external file. 30 Click OK twice. can be used for any number-based parameter. and reporting the shared parameters. for Currency. select $. not just for currency. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. either within family components or within the project template. You draw a travel path line. In this lesson. which inserts commas after every three digits. ensuring consistency across families and projects. regardless of category. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. for Rounding. 29 Select Use digit grouping. tag the line. you create a shared parameter file. adding the shared parameters to a family. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. 26 In the Project Units dialog. click the Format value.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. Digit grouping. creating a generic tag to tag the family. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units.35 The Estimated cost is calculated.

and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress.txt. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. and click OK. under Groups. click New. for Name. type OfficeStandardsParameters. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. type Travel Distance.rvt. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 11 Click OK twice. click New. select Length. for Name. and click OK. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click New. type Path ID. 9 Under Parameters. for File name. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 7 Under Parameters. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. type Exiting. click Training Files. for Name. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Save. click Create. for Type of Parameter.

under Parameters. If you have multiple projects open.rvt. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Constraints. and click Select. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and select Instance. Click Training Files. under Parameter Type. for Group parameter under. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. type Length. 10 Using the same method. 13 Click Apply. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Parameter Data. click Family Types. 3 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. click Add. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. 8 Select Instance. for Travel Distance Formula. following the equals symbol (=). under Dimensions.rfa. 12 In the Family Types dialog. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project.rvt.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. click Add. and click OK. group it under Dimensions. under Parameters. and click OK. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. click Load into Projects. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 14 On the Design Bar. select Shared parameter. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. 9 In the Family Types dialog. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. in the Load into Projects dialog. and click OK. 15 If necessary. otherwise the family loads into the current project.

select Travel Distance. 19 On the Design Bar. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. under Category Parameters. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. select Travel Distance. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. click (Add Parameter). click Select. under Parameters.rft. and click OK. 24 Click OK twice. 25 In the Edit Label dialog.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Label. click parameter(s) to label). 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 21 In the Edit Label dialog. click Training Files. click Label. (Add 26 On the Design Bar.

rvt is selected. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. 29 In the drawing window. and move it down. click Load into Projects. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. select Path ID. 33 On the Design Bar. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. and press DELETE.rfa. type M_Travel Distance Tag. and click Save. click Modify. 35 Save the file. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 . for File Name. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress.28 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 32 In the Save As dialog.

double-click Exiting Plan . You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Level 1. 4 On the Options Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. and click in the center of the corridor. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. above the exterior door as shown.Placing. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Component. select Chain. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 6 Move the cursor to the right.Tagging. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. After the lines are tagged. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans.rvt.

Level 2. through the door. click Modify. click Component. click Modify. verify that Chain is selected. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. and click (Element Properties). 13 While pressing CTRL. 10 On the Options Bar. and click outside of the building. 17 On the Options Bar. 11 Select each of the travel path lines.7 Move the cursor down. double click Exiting Plan . 14 In the Element Properties dialog. type 1-1. for Path ID. click Tag ➤ By Category. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. under Constraints. Placing. move the cursor near the right corner. 8 On the Design Bar.Tagging. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. select the 2 dashed travel lines. 12 On the Design Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . clear Leader. under Floor Plans.

19 Move the cursor up through the door. and click. 23 Move the cursor down. move the cursor to the left. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Modify. and click above the door to the stair. click Component. 20 On the Design Bar. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. and click in the stair. 21 On the Design Bar.

click Modify.Tagging. 30 Using the same method. click Tag ➤ By Category. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Path ID. under Constraints. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. type Level 1 Exit Distance. click Modify. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. under Category. Placing. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. type 2-1.24 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 33 For Name. 27 On the Design Bar. . verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. 28 While pressing CTRL. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities.

38 For Sort by. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. select Path ID. select Path ID.rvt. 36 For Filter by. in the first field. type Level 2 Exit Distance. select Travel Distance. click Edit. 45 In the Rename View dialog. 40 Click the Formatting tab. for Filter. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. 41 Under Fields. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Calculate totals. 44 In the Project Browser. 42 Click OK. while pressing CTRL. 46 In the Project Browser. in the third field. select contains. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. 49 Click OK twice. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. and click Properties. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and under Field formatting. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. type 1-.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and in the third field. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Filter by. 35 Click the Filter tab. 43 In the Project Browser. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. under Schedules/Quantities. in the second field. and click Rename. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Add. type 2-. click Training Files. select Path ID and Travel Distance. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 50 Save the file. under Other. under Available fields.

2 In the New Schedule dialog. expand C .152 mm. right-click Generic . and select C1010145 . under Categories. click Schedule/Quantities. and click View. click the Fields tab. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. for Assembly Code. 9 Click OK twice. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 . right-click the Design Bar. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. under Identity Data. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. click the Value field.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . and click . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. 10 In the schedule. 4 Under Available fields. and click Properties.Drywall w/ Metal Stud.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 .Partitions . select the following fields. select Walls.Fixed Partitions. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. and click OK.Interiors ➤ C10 .

Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. 6 Click Finish. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. type Revit_Project. click Create. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 3 Click New. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. the database display may be different than that shown. click the File Data Source tab. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. 9 Under Directories. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and click OK to create the database. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click OK. under Database.mdb. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. and click Next. and click Next. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access.11 Close the exercise file. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. for Database Name. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. 11 Click OK 3 times. select a location for the database file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. 1 On the File menu.mdb). 8 In the New Database dialog. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. click Training Files.

This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. 13 Close the exercise file. For example. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. Additionally. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. in addition to the Id column.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description.

262 .

Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. 263 . as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. like a standard door header condition. add detail components. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. These components display at the required scale. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. plywood. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. you trace over the building model geometry. In order to detail from the building model. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. and metal studs. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. In the callout view. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. 297 . using detail components to represent materials like lumber.

click Training Files. They are also view specific. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Detailing the View In this exercise. 7 In the drawing area. and insulation objects. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The roof overhang detail displays. you detail the view of the roof edge.rfa. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click the detail callout head. and click OK. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. as well as detail lines. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. which means that all detail components. and click Open. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. click Training Files.rvt. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. select As underlay. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 5 In the alert dialog. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Exact location is not important. region objects. click Detail Component. You load detail components. After you add components. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . for Graphics ➤ Display Model. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model.

12 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. select Corrugated Metal. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. and click OK. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail.5mm. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. 13 In the Name dialog. click Repeating Detail. for Pattern ➤ Detail. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 For Spacing. click Edit/New. 16 Click OK twice. Detailing the View | 299 . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties).8 Delete the component. 17 In the drawing area. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. click Modify. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. click Duplicate. 10 On the Options Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. enter 406.

■ ■ Click Modify. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section.rfa. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 24 In the Type Selector. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. and click Open. 22 On the Options Bar. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Load.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. click (Move). and on the Edit toolbar. click Training Files.

32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. and place it in the detail view as shown. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog.rvt. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. press SPACEBAR 3 times.Because you still have several components to load. you load them as a group from a single file. click OK. 33 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. Detailing the View | 301 . 29 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 31 To properly orient the component. 30 In the Type Selector. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. click Training Files. and click Open.

36 Place the wallboard component as shown. 35 On the Options Bar. select Chain. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. click the Flip instance arrows. and click Modify. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 37 Click Modify.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 38 Select the horizontal segment. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist.

Detailing the View | 303 . enter 140mm. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. 42 Click Modify. select to near side. ■ Click Modify. as shown. For Offset. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. click Detail Component. and on the Edit toolbar. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. click Insulation. click (Move).

46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 51 Click Modify. as shown.45 In the Type Selector. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Like detail components. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. and lock the component. you add lines to your detail. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the Type Selector.rvt. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. meaning they display only in this view. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. click Detail Lines. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. they are view specific. 47 In the Type Selector. select Thin Lines.

Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Lines. 11 In the Type Selector. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. select Thin Lines. and press ENTER. click Detail Lines. For Offset. and press ENTER. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. For Offset. enter 10mm. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). select Medium Lines. 7 In the Type Selector. as shown.4 Click Modify. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. as shown. enter 10mm. Adding Detail Lines | 305 .

15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. and draw the detail lines as shown.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. click (Draw). 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 16 On the Options Bar. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. select Chain. and clear Chain. as shown.

22 In the Project Browser. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. 24 On the View Control Bar. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. enter 10mm. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . When you turn the display model off. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. select the Penthouse level line. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. select Do not display. draw the detail lines as shown. select Vapor Barrier. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). right-click. and click Properties. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. click Detail Lines.18 In the Type Selector. Click (Pick Lines). right-click Roof Overhang Detail. and click OK. 26 In the Type Selector. select Thin Lines. and press ENTER. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. For Offset. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. for Graphics ➤ Display Model.

press SPACEBAR as necessary. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. click Detail Component. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Adding Text Notes on page 308. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. select M_Break Line. 34 Proceed to the next exercise.29 On the Design Bar. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. 30 In the Type Selector. you add text notes to complete the detail. 32 Click Modify.

Click again to specify the location of the text box. and click to place the dimension. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. click Dimension. click Text. Enter the text. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 2 On the Options Bar. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes | 309 . 6 Click Modify.

right-click. for Suffix. and click Rename. right-click. click Roof Overhang Detail. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). Creating Detail Components on page 310. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and press DELETE. click 6 In the Filter dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. and click OK. (Filter Selection). enter Typ.Keynotes. and click the dimension text. click Select All Instances. and save the exercise file. on the Options Bar. and click OK. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. select a text note. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes.7 Select the dimension line. enter Roof Overhang Detail . and click OK. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. under Text Fields.. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. right-click.rvt. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

16 Click Modify. 15 Use a window to select all linework. in the Type Selector. select all the coping linework. select Medium Lines. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.7 Click Modify. 14 Click Modify.rft. and click Open. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. Creating Detail Components | 311 . 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. while pressing CTRL. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and selecting the chain. click Training Files. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. pressing TAB. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog.

While pressing SHIFT. and click Save. double-click it in the Project Browser. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Component. The original linework remains selected. 24 On the Options Bar. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 30 In the drawing area. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. delete the underlying linework. 23 Using a window. 25 In the Filter dialog. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. for File name. click Training Files. navigate to your preferred location. click . The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail .Keynotes view is not the open view. clear Detail Items. click Load into Projects. 28 On the Options Bar. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 31 Using the same method used previously. and the component can be placed in the detail. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. 27 On the Design Bar. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. select the coping.18 In the Save As dialog. 26 Press DELETE. and click Open. click Detail Component. you place keynotes on objects. enter Roof Edge. 22 Click Modify. 21 To place the component. click Load.rfa. Adding Keynotes on page 312. and click OK. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

For the metal coping. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag.B5. 6 Click Modify. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Keynote ➤ Element. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 19mm Plywood. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area.rfa. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. use keynote 06160.D11. click Training Files. Click to place the leader arm. and click OK. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. click Edit/New.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Roof Edge4. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. (Element Properties).rvt. and click Open. use keynote 07645. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Keynotes | 313 . navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210.C1. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 63mm Rigid Insulation. In the Keynotes dialog. 2 In the alert dialog. select the metal fascia with drip edge. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project.

FasciaProfile_1.9 In the Type Properties dialog. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. For the 50 x 150. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted.D1. 11 Click OK 3 times. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard.G1. using keynote 07460. click in the Value column. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. For the 50 x 200.F1. use keynote 06110. use keynote 06110. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. click Detail Component. select Corrugated Metal. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. 17 Keynote the component. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 12 On the Design Bar. 22mm Corrugated Steel . 10 In the Keynotes dialog. navigate to 07645.I1. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. For the 50 x 300. use keynote 06110. use keynote 06160. click Keynote ➤ Element.F1. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties.D11. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. and click . 18 Save the file. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. You do this in order to keynote the component.20 Ga.A8. 15 In the Type Selector. use keynote 09250.

4 In the Type Selector. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Training Files. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. 8 In the Save As dialog. and click Modify.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select the left end point of the reference line. and click Open. 13 In the Type Selector. 22 On the Options Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 Press DELETE. select Medium Line Detail Component. click Duplicate. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . for File name. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. click Detail Component.rvt. 19 In the Name dialog. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. click Load. and click Open. 9 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. and click Save. and select the right end point. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 16 Select the component. navigate to your preferred location. select Medium Lines. 5 In the drawing area. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based.rft. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 15 Click Modify. and click (Element Properties). click Load into Projects. and m_Light Line Detail Component. click Training Files. click Edit/New. click Lines. 6 Lock the line. 24 While pressing CTRL. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 20 Click OK 3 times.

44 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 Select the component just added. 27 On the Design Bar. click (Move). and hidden) used in the view. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. and click . click Duplicate. 46 Click Modify. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. click Detail Component. 38 On the Design Bar. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. select m_Light Line Detail Component. and click . navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. and assign it keynote 07260. click in the Value column. on the Edit toolbar. invisible. click Detail Component.A5. enter EPDM Membrane. and assign it keynote 06110. 48 Using the same method used previously. against the 19mm plywood. and click . 34 In the Name dialog. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 37 Click OK 3 times. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 28 In the Type Selector. and click the lower end at the break line. name the component Air Barrier. and click . 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 29 In the drawing area.A1. 40 Click Modify. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 31 Select the component. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. click Edit/New. and click OK. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 42 Using the same method used previously. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. 30 Click Modify.25 Next. 47 Select the component. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 49 With the component selected.G1. click Detail Component.

57 Select the vertical hidden line component. click Detail Component. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. and click . select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. select Chain. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 53 On the Options Bar. leaving the detail component lines. 52 In the Type Selector. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 . 55 Click Modify.

58 Using the method used previously. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. 50 x 200 Framing.rfa. 68 In the drawing area. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. click Load into Projects. 67 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. select Invisible Lines. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component.rfa. in the Type Selector. 61 In the drawing area. 63 In the drawing area. and assign it keynote 07260.A4. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. select the component. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Keynote ➤ Element. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Air Barrier. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . name the component Vapor Barrier. 60 On the Design Bar. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. and Vapor Barrier.

A9.txt. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. add a keynote for the component. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture.rvt. under Keynote Table. 3 In the text editor. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. and press ENTER. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 70 Using the method used previously. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. 73 Proceed to the next exercise.A1. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing.A4. 71 In the drawing area. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. and assign it keynote 07210. click File menu ➤ Save.. and press TAB. The database file opens in a text editor. name the component Batt Insul. Enter 07460. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise.69 Select the component. and close the text editor. and click . click Browse. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. Enter 07463. and press TAB. 72 Save the file.

You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. navigate to 07463.A1. click to place the leader. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. In the Type Selector. select Absolute. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. you learn how to create a drafted detail. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. under Path Type. 11 Click Modify. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. Each keynote displays as a simple number. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. 13 Click Modify. 14 Save the file. These details do not update with changes to the building model. After you create a drafting view. 9 In the drawing area. and click OK. click Keynote ➤ Element. and click Open.txt. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. and click to place the note. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. select all the keynotes. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK.

The detail is imported as an import symbol. and click OK. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. and click Rename. 7 In the Rename View dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for Scale. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. enter EPDM Metal Coping. For Colors. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. The detail that you import is in DWG format. select 1 : 5. 6 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. right-click Drafting 1. Click Open. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. and click OK. For Positioning. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. verify that Auto .Center to Center is selected.dwg. select Black and White.rvt. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).

The callout head no longer displays a reference label. click Rename. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. select Reference other view. and use the callout grips to move the callout head.No Reference. 12 Click OK twice. 10 In the Rename dialog.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. delete the existing value. click Callout. 6 Select the callout. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. and click OK. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 5 Click Modify. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click Properties. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. for New. click Edit/New. enter Detail . double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

/Det. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail .Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. click Modify. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.No Reference). and double-click the callout. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 . Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser./Sect. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. double-click A105 .Elev. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. 18 Save the file. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. The callout is updated with the sheet information.

click Duplicate. 11 In the Name dialog. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 14 Click OK 3 times. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. 3 On the View Control Bar. click Filled Region. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. enter Gyp. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. select Gypsum-Plaster. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. Board. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 5 In the Type Selector. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. click Detail Component. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. for Name. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. . for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. and click OK.rvt. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. verify that the scale is 1 : 5.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. enter Header @ Sliding Door. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. click Region Properties. and click OK. for Name.

Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. and enter 20. 17 Click Modify. Draw a rectangle as shown. select the left and bottom edges of the region. 20 On the Design Bar. click (Draw).15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. (Mirror). click . 19 In the Type Selector.5mm. 16 Select the left edge of the region. and on the Edit toolbar. click 22 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. select the width dimension. select Wide Lines. 18 While pressing CTRL.

326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Move the cursor up. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. select Wood . and click OK. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 In the Name dialog. 33 Click OK 3 times. click Region Properties. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 24 Select the mirrored region. enter Wood . click Filled Region. for Name. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate.Finish. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 25 Click Modify. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. and click above the top of the region as the end point.Finish. .

41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. verify that the thickness is 19mm. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. Draw a rectangle as shown. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. 39 In the Type Selector. 40 On the Options Bar. select Medium Lines. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. click Finish Sketch. 38 On the Design Bar. click . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . select Medium Lines. in the Type Selector.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click (Align). 37 On the Design Bar.5mm. click Filled Region. sketch the new region as shown. and select the right edge of the wood region. click (Rectangle). verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar.

328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 47 Click the reference plane. enter 6mm. and press ENTER. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. 46 On the Tools toolbar. and press ENTER. enter 10mm. click 48 Click Modify. (Align). and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it.42 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. For Offset. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. For Offset.

and click to select the point. and press ENTER. Move the cursor left 25mm. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. Move the cursor down 305mm. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . Select Chain. enter 0. 56 On the Design Bar. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. 54 On the Tools toolbar. Move the cursor right 25mm. For Offset. and select the bottom horizontal line. click Finish Sketch.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). and click to select the point. and click to select the point. click (Trim/Extend).

330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 62 Select the left detail line. top. 65 On the Options Bar. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. click Training Files. and right edges of the door panel region. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER.rfa. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. click Detail Lines. select the height dimension.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. 61 Click Modify. select Medium Lines. and press ENTER. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. For Offset. 69 Select the bolt. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. enter 76. 58 In the Type Selector.2mm. 68 Click Modify. 60 Select the left. and click Open. click Detail Component. enter 3mm. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. click Load.

rfa. click Detail Lines.70 On the Design Bar. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. select Wide Lines. use the images as a guide. and click Open. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . click Training Files. 74 Select the expansion bolt. 76 In the Type Selector. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. click Detail Component. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. 71 On the Options Bar. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. click Load. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side.

click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. click Detail Lines. 80 On the Options Bar. 87 Click Modify. 84 On the Design Bar. 79 In the Type Selector. (Mirror). click . click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines.78 On the Design Bar. 82 Select the rectangle. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and on the Edit toolbar. 85 On the Options Bar. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. click .

Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . as shown. click (Mirror). select Medium Lines. 89 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. and on the Edit toolbar.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. 90 In the Type Selector. 92 Select the line. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection.

click . click Detail Component. select the length dimension. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 95 On the Design Bar. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select M_Break Line. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 103 Add two break lines as shown. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. 99 Click Modify. enter 3mm. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. 102 In the Type Selector. 101 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. and click to place the arc as shown. click Detail Lines. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 97 On the Options Bar.

Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. and click Modify. and click Modify. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . click Dimension. click Dimension. 106 Click to place the dimension. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. using the Drag Text grip. drag the text for the smaller dimension.5mm Arial. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 107 On the Design Bar. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 110 Select the dimension line. 105 In the drawing area. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. 108 In the Type Selector.

2. 113 Under Text Fields. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . under Dimension Value. for Below. and then click the dimension text. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. under Dimension Value. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types.5mmArial. click Dimension. and enter Varies. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. select Replace With Text. 114 Click OK. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. select Replace With Text. and click the dimension text. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog. enter See Schedule. 118 Select Modify to end the command.

and click Modify. click (Add Right Arc Leader). click to create an arced leader. 123 Click OK. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. Board. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. and click to place the text. 128 Select the note. select the gypsum board region on the left. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. 127 Enter Gyp. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . 125 In the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. click Text. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. Enter 225 mm @ Type C.121 Click OK. 126 In the drawing area.

132 Save the file. click Modify to end the command.131 On the Design Bar. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

and double-click East. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. click Training Files. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 339 .rvt. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Creating a Note Block In this exercise.

3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. click Modify. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door.Hexagon. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Training Files. 7 On the Design Bar. type 1. 8 Select the keynote.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Number of Leaders.rfa. click Symbol.

9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. 12 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK. for Text. Creating a Note Block | 341 . click (Element Properties). type Seal existing doors and insulate. and click above the tag to place the copy. 13 Select the tag. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. click (Copy). on the Options Bar.

and on the Options Bar. click Copy. 19 With the tag selected. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. on the Options Bar. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . type B. and click. 16 For Tag. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. 17 Click OK. click (Element Properties). (Mirror).14 With the copy selected. 18 Using the same method. on the Edit toolbar. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. 15 For Text. type Repair existing door surround.

Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Repair as required. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation.21 On the Design Bar. 22 Optionally. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . and moving counter-clockwise. Clean exterior brick wall. using the table as a reference. Tuckpoint as required. click Modify. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Remove all existing windows. Repair existing door surround. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean existing concrete loading dock.

for Note block name. and click OK. On the Appearance tab. for Heading. On the Formatting tab. Clean cut and repair wall as required. for Header text. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. 28 In the Project Browser. select Exterior Construction Notes. for the value. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Create. and drag it to the sheet. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and click Add.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. 29 In the Project Browser. verify that Arial is selected. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. type Exterior Construction Notes. and double-click A103 . type Mark. type 6 mm. expand Schedules/Quantities. select Center. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. for Sort by. select Tag. under Available fields. 27 In the column header (text). select Tag. and select Bold. type Description. expand Sheets (all). and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. 26 Click OK. Select Text. and click Add. 24 In the New Note Block dialog.Elevations. format. and for Alignment.

Title Sheet. click Modify. 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. under Sheets (all). you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project.rvt. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.31 On the Design Bar. double-click T . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Using Drawing Lists | 345 .

in the second field. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select Sheet Number. expand Schedules/Quantities. for Sort by. and click Add. 7 In the Project Browser. for Filter by. 6 In the Project Browser. under Available fields. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. and click Add. type T. ■ 4 Click OK. under Sheets (all). On the Filter tab. select does not equal. select Sheet Number. select Sheet Number. and drag it to the sheet. 5 In the list title field. and in the third field. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab.Title Sheet. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. The drawing list displays. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. select Sheet Index. double-click T .2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. in the first field. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. Select Sheet Name.

10 Zoom in to the drawing list. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule.9 On the Design Bar. door frame schedule. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. Finally. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. and so on). doors. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. 11 Save the file. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. On construction documents. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. click Modify. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. windows. Training File Using Legends | 347 . and door frames. For the text. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. On construction documents.

Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . 8 In the Type Properties dialog. for Name. click Text.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. type Typical Symbol Legend. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. click . 9 For Text Font. 6 On the Options Bar.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . and click OK. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. click Symbol. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. click Duplicate. click Edit/New.rvt.Open Level Head . Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. and click OK twice. select Arial. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . you create a text type with the necessary size. 10 For Text Size. for Name. type 3mm. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. and click OK. type Legend Text.

click Typical Symbol Legend. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 . 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. and for Leader. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. expand Legends. verify that is selected. expand Sheets (all). 16 In the Project Browser. and double-click A101 . and click to place it.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. 14 Working from the top down.Site Plan/Floor Plan. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point.

click Modify. select Viewport : No Titlemark. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 23 Save the file. double-click A102 . and click to place it. under Sheets. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 21 In the Type Selector. 19 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required.Unit 18.17 In the Type Selector. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet.

select Section. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. For View. type 900 mm. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 For Scale. 5 On the View Control Bar. click Legend Component. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. type 4th Floor Wall Types. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. select Medium for Detail Level. For Host length. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. select 1 : 50. for Name.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and press ENTER. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. and click OK.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise.

14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. click Text. click Modify.9 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. for Family. 10 Select the second wall. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. 12 In the Type Selector. 13 On the Options Bar. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. for Leader. click to add text without a leader. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

click to add text with a single-segment leader. right-click Sheets (all). 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. and click New Sheet. and drag it to the new sheet. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. pressing ENTER between component descriptions.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. 23 In the Project Browser. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. The text note with leader is added to the legend. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . 19 Type the following text. select Level 4.

double-click Level 4. under Floor Plans. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 26 On the Design Bar. drag it onto the sheet. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. select 4th Floor Wall Types. The open drawings are both visible. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. under Legends.25 In the Project Browser. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. 29 In the Project Browser. click Modify to end the command. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.

indicating that it captured the wall type properties. Creating a Component Legend | 355 .Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. select Detail Level: Medium. 33 In the floor plan view. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. 34 Select the patio divider wall. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. 35 On the View Control Bar. select the Wall Type 2 component. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. click (Match Type).

and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed.rvt.36 Optionally. In this exercise. click 37 Save the file. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Using the table. or changes in building material availability. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. You can create a sequence of revisions. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . unanticipated changes in construction conditions. under Floor Plans. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. contractor inquiries. These changes can be due to owner requests. double-click Level 4. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser.

verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. the revision is locked and issued to the field.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. When Issued is selected. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. 5 For Description. For example. If Visible is not selected. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . If you select Per Sheet. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. In general. type a date. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. verify that Per Project is selected. In most instances. yet as concise as possible. for Numbering. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. When you use this option. if the active revision is number 1. 7 Under Show.

Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. click (Move). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Select the divider. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 3 Select the divider. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views.8 Click OK. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. you make changes to the project floor plan. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. including revision number and revision date. move the cursor up. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider.rvt. double-click Level 4. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. Revision clouds have read-only properties. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. click Modify. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. 4 On the Edit toolbar. under Floor Plans. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. 9 Save the file.

Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . 8 In the drawing area. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. 11 On the Design Bar. select Snaps Off.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. click Revision Cloud. and click OK. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. click Finish Sketch. In the Snaps dialog. click near the partition you moved. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud.

16 Click OK. click the Annotation Objects tab. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. you load a revision tag into the project. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. select 6. for Line Weight. 17 Save the file. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise.

10 In the drawing area. Working with Revisions In this exercise. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . the cloud is tagged as number 1. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. 4 On the Options Bar. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. scroll down to Revision Clouds. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. Because you chose to number by project. select Leader. 5 In the Tags dialog. you create additional revisions in the revision table.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud.rfa. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. 6 Click Load. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. click Training Files. 8 In the Tags dialog. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. and because the revision is the first in the project. click OK. You then issue a revision. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. click Tag ➤ By Category. double-click Level 4. 12 Save the file. under Floor Plans. you need to add one. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. 11 Click to place the tag. click Tags. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view.

9 Click OK. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. click Add. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. select Issued. NOTE After you issue a revision. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 7 For Description. and enter a date for the revision. 8 Add another revision row. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed.rvt. with the description Relocate Door. type Modify Paving Area. and enter a date.Unnamed. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. You can continue to add revisions. under Sheets. You do this by issuing the revision. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. double-click A107 . You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. you prevent further changes to the revision. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. you can no longer modify it. and click OK.

11 On the Drafting tab. 13 Click Finish Sketch. select Seq. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. Working with Revisions | 363 .Modify Paving Area. 17 Using the same method learned previously. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. in the drawing area. for Revision. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. select Revision Cloud. click to add a revision clouds. double-click Level 4.Unnamed. 15 On the Options Bar. 19 To add tags. select the revision cloud. 2 . under Floor Plans. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. 10 In the Project Browser. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. under Sheets (all). apply Seq. double-click A107 . select Tag ➤ By Category. 3 . 12 In the drawing area. 20 On the Project Browser.

clear Issued. and rotation) to the revision schedule. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. Click Options. You do this so that the revision can be changed. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. beginning with "D". Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. 25 Click OK twice. for Sequence. delete the first 3 characters. height. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. For each revision. for Numbering. select Alphabetic. you edit the titleblock family. 26 In the drawing area. select the titleblock.

36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. right-click Revision Schedule. Select Outline. 34 On the Design Bar. for Build Schedule. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. 28 In the alert dialog. Working with Revisions | 365 . ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. under Other. and drag it above the schedule area.27 On the Options Bar. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 33 Select the schedule header. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. Clear Blank row before data. for Appearance. click Load into Projects. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. click Edit. click Yes. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. click Yes. and click Properties. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. and press DELETE. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. Select Grid lines. click Edit Family. select Bottom-up.

With a user-defined height. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. enter Rev. select User defined. right-click Revision Schedule. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. select 90° Counterclockwise. 46 Click OK twice. for Rotation on Sheet. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. and click Properties. and on the Options Bar. for Heading. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . When the height property is variable. 40 Select the revision schedule header. 45 On the Appearance tab. click Edit. for Formatting. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. select the revision schedule. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. for Height. open the titleblock family for editing. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format.. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. under Other.

Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. text. click Load into Projects. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . click Yes. you learn to import information (such as images. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. 51 Save the file.

3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Design Bar. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets.rvt.rvt.Importing Image Files In this exercise. for Leader. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Title Sheet. under Sheets. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click to add text without a leader.JPG. click Text. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. double-click T . and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. and place it on a sheet. double-click T . 3 On the Options Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Title Sheet. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Training Files. click Modify.

Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. 11 Save the file.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.doc text file in another window. 6 Select the text. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . with the new text box still selected. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. 9 On the Design Bar. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. click Modify.

Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. under Sheets.mdi. This process may vary from system to system. This exercise demonstrates a common method.JPG. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. click Modify. This step has been completed for you. 4 Under Printer. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. select the document writer. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. 1 In the Project Browser. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. for File name.Unit 18. click Desktop.rvt. and click Save. double-click A102 .xls. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. 10 On the Design Bar. click Training Files.JPG. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. 3 In Microsoft Excel. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. type Fixture Schedule. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. click File menu ➤ Print. 5 Click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for Name. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. 12 Save the file. and saved as Fixture Schedule.

called dependent views. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. or footprint. The large floor plan. To effectively document this project.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. as well as a large lab building. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. 371 . The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. you break up the plan into sections.

372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise.

enter Level 2 . The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. right-click Level 2. 3 In the Project Browser. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. and click OK.Aviary. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and the model crop is the interior crop region. and click Rename. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. click Zoom To Fit. under Floor Plans. under Level 2. 6 In the drawing area. for Name.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. 4 In the Rename View dialog. select the crop region. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 5 Click in the drawing area. 2 In the Project Browser. The dependent view opens. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 . click (Hide Crop Region). confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). 9 On the View Control Bar.8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up.

12 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit.10 Click in the drawing area. click Zoom To Fit. enter Level 2 . and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click OK.Labs. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 15 Select the crop region. and on the Zoom flyout. for Name. 13 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Level 2. and on the Zoom flyout. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 14 Click in the drawing area. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs).

22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. 19 On the View Control Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. click Matchline. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. click Modify. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. 20 Click in the drawing area. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. double-click Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. and on the Zoom flyout.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . click (Hide Crop Region).

and click. click Finish Sketch. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. Click above the left corner of the lab building. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. 24 On the Design Bar.

31 In the Project Browser. for Line Weight. enter Level 2 Aviary. and drag it onto the sheet. select 9. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. select Double Dash. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog.Unnamed.Aviary. 28 For Line Pattern. click Level 2 .25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and click OK. for Name. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . under Floor Plans. click OK to accept the default titleblock. expand Sheets. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 33 In the Project Browser. right-click A101 . 27 Under Matchline. and click Rename. and click OK. click the Annotation Objects tab.

38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Labs dependent view on the sheet. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.Aviary is selected. click View Reference. under Floor Plans. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 39 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 2. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click Modify. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. and place the Level 2 .35 On the Design Bar. for Target view.

click Zoom To Fit. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . 41 On the Options Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. 44 On the Design Bar. click Modify.Labs. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. 45 On the Zoom flyout. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. for Target view.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline.

double-click Level 2 .Aviary. click (Show Crop Region). Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. under Floor Plans. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. click the far right control. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing.46 In the Project Browser. 47 On the View Control Bar. after modifying the annotation crop region. 49 If. 48 Select the crop region. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. right-click. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. expand Level 1. right-click Level 2. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. 55 On the Zoom flyout. and click Apply Dependent Views. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. select all views in the list. 51 On the View Control Bar. 54 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. but are not placed on sheets. 53 In the Select Views dialog. and click OK. under Floor Plans.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. 52 In the Project Browser. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1.

and double-click South Elevation. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 2 In the Project Browser.57 On the Zoom flyout. The matchline is already placed in the view. right-click South Elevation.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. click Zoom To Fit. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).

Right. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. enter South Elevation . for Name. click (Hide Crop Region). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.Left. cropping the view to the aviary. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . 10 In the Rename View dialog. 4 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 7 On the View Control Bar.The dependent view opens. 8 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Project Browser. 11 Select the crop region. and click Rename. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and click OK. 5 In the drawing area. and click OK. select the Crop Region. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. right-click South Elevation. expand South Elevation. cropping the view to the lab building. 9 In the Project Browser. and drag it toward the center of the view. for Name. enter South Elevation .

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

17 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Perspective View on page 403. Creating a Perspective View | 403 .15 On the Design Bar. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. click Modify.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. click Camera. The perspective view displays. on the View tab of the Design Bar. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open.rvt. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required.

under Floor Plans. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. With the camera shown. Depending on camera placement. and adjust the field of vision. as necessary.3 Zoom out. and select the crop boundary. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. right-click 3D View 1. If the camera is not shown in the view. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. as shown. in the Project Browser. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. and click Show Camera. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . double-click Site.

enter Exterior . 10 Save the file.6 In the Project Browser. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. and click OK. and click Rename. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. right-click 3D View 1. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 7 In the Rename View dialog.Day to open the view. under 3D Views. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Exterior . 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window.Day.

and render a daytime view of the exterior. double-click Exterior .rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under 3D Views. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. c_Pool_House_in_progress.Day. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. modify render settings.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . You then duplicate the view. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser.

NOTE If a background image is required. select Edit/New. under Lighting. 3 In the Rendering dialog. under Background. select Spring Equinox. You create a location and time for the rendering. and click Render. 3pm. and click Rename.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. 8 Under Quality. enter Spring Equinox . the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. for Setting. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. You adjust cloud settings as required. select Sky: Cloudy. select Medium. for Sun. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . In this case. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. 5 In the Rename dialog. 6 Click OK twice. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 7 In the Rendering dialog. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. for New.Santa Monica.

click Export. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. select Portable Network Graphics (*. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open.png).9 In the Rendering dialog. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. 10 In the Rendering dialog. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the rendering. Click Save. click Show the model. For Files of type. click Desktop. After the image is rendered.

Flat Round : 60W . and click Move to Group. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. under Ungrouped Lights. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. select Exterior: Artificial only. select the first light. under Group Options. you duplicate the view and change the settings. 19 In the New Light Group dialog.Night.Day. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. under Ungrouped Lights. 22 Using the same method. under 3D Views. verify that Pool Lights is selected. enter Pool House Lights. 25 Using the same method. press and hold SHIFT.Flat Round : 60W . on the View Control Bar. and click Artificial Lights. dialog.120V to the Pool Lights group. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. under Group Options.Flat Round : 60W . 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 27 In the Rendering dialog. enter Pool Lights.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . and click OK. click New.120V. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog.Night view open. 16 With the Exterior . 24 In the New Light Group dialog. and click OK.Night.Flat Round : 60W . right-click Exterior . 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Day view to Exterior . Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. To select a sequential list. click New.Exterior . click Render. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. for Scheme.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. for Name.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . click Dialog). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. click OK. and click OK. for Name. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . highlight 9 :Sconce Light . add 30 :Sconce Light . under Lighting. and select the last light.

After the image is rendered. under Image. enter 4. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. click Adjust Exposure. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. In this example. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. you change the brightness of the exposure. for Exposure Value. and click OK. 30 In the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View on page 411. 32 Save the file.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. Rendering an Interior View | 411 .

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. render the views. define the perspective view and rendering settings. and finally. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Adding RPC People In this exercise. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view.

4 In the Type Selector. double-click Level 1. click Modify. and place the component inside the pool house. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. Adding RPC People | 413 . the person’s line of sight. and on the Edit toolbar. select RPC Female : YinYin. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. 5 On the Design Bar. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. ■ (Rotate). 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. 6 Select the figure. Exact placement is not important. click Component. under Floor Plans.

the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. By default. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. 14 Save the file. 13 On the Design Bar. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. you can enable this option. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. 12 Click OK 3 times. on the Options Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. for Render Appearance Properties. click Edit. under Parameters. under Identity Data. click Edit/New. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. click Modify. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. In order to see the figure’s reflection. click (Element Properties). select Cast Reflections.

click Camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise.15 Proceed to the next exercise. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective.

4 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Extents. right-click 3D View 1.The perspective view displays. select Section Box. and click Properties. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. under 3D Views. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.

under Elevations (Building Elevations). 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 9 In the Project Browser. double-click South. 11 In the 3D view. under Floor Plans.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 8 In the Project Browser. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . In order to accurately adjust the section box. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. select the section box. in addition to the 3D view. double-click Level 1.

13 In the South Elevation view. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. size the box as shown. 14 In the 3D view. right-click.12 In the floor plan view. select the section box. size the box as shown. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

18 Proceed to the next exercise. To create a daytime view. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. and curtain walls. doors that contain windows or glass. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. 17 Save the file. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. and render the interior view.15 Maximize the 3D view. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration.

c_Pool_House_in_progress. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 7 Under Quality. click Render. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. 8 In the Rendering dialog. under Lighting. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. select Interior: Artificial only. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering.rvt. 5 Click Artificial Lights. under 3D Views. and click Rename. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. right-click 3D View 1. for Scheme. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. you turn them off for this scene. 3 On the View Control Bar. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 4 In the Rendering dialog.Night.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. clear Pool Lights. 2 In the Rename View dialog. You can specify a lower quality. After these settings are established. and click OK. for Setting. enter Interior . select Draft. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option.

select Interior: Sun only. for Sun. and click Render. select Edit. You create a view for the interior during the day. 3pm. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. the daylight portals can be turned on. The preset schemes are read-only. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. select Region. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . (Show Rendering Dialog). right-click Interior . Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. By default they are turned off. and click OK. for Daylight Portal Options. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. click Copy To Custom. For more information on daylight portals. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. In this case.Santa Monica.Day. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. For sunlit interiors. for Scheme.9 Close the Rendering dialog. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. click 14 For Setting. select Curtain Walls. in order to turn on daylight portals. select Spring Equinox . you must create a custom setting. 17 In the Rendering dialog. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. but the space will receive standard daylighting.Night. 13 In the Rendering dialog.

under Image. Click OK. For Saturation. and on the Options Bar. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. click Show the model.18 In the Rendering dialog. 20 In the Rendering dialog. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. enter 1. and close the Rendering dialog. In the next steps. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter 10. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. click Adjust Exposure. select the column on the right. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. click Properties).

you can define the output and quality settings for final output. 23 With the column still selected. 30 In the drawing area. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. You change the varnish setting. clear Region. the render time increases significantly. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. and click OK. 28 In the Rendering dialog. For Rotate. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. select Unfinished.22 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 In the Rendering dialog. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. 24 In the Materials dialog. select the crop boundary. For Width. For Bump. for Resolution. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. select Printer.6. click (Show Rendering Dialog). select Scale (locked proportions). select Wood. click OK. enter 5''. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. and click Render. under Output Settings. click the dimensions for Size. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. for Setting. As size and DPI are increased. enter 90. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. and on the Options Bar. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . 29 In the Rendering dialog. add a bump map to create texture. 26 Click Update Preview. For Amount. select Based on wood grain. Click OK. select High.

You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. The walkthrough path is a spline. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. but you can also define it in a 3D. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. elevation. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. independent of the Revit Architecture software. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view.The rendered image displays. Usually. In a plan view. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. or section view. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output.

TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. and double-click 1st Floor. proceeds through the dining room. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . click Walkthrough. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and ends in the far corner of the living room. expand Floor Plans. and open Common\c_Townhouse. If you prefer to use metric values. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. on the Options Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse.rvt. click Training Files. expand Views (all). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. verify that Perspective is selected. and click the tab in the context menu. click Settings ➤ Project Units. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. and change unit formats as desired. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise.

Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. on the Options Bar. and double-click Walkthrough 1. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. click Finish. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room.

12 On the View menu. 14 Click . 13 On the Options Bar. 11 Under Change. for Width. 17 Click . If it is not. and click OK. 16 On the Options Bar. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. click the dimensions for Size. enter 9''. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. and click OK. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. click Edit Walkthrough. and for Height. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . enter 16''. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. for Frame. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). verify that Field of view is selected. enter 1. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). and select the crop boundary. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. select the crop boundary.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips.

proceed to the next exercise. c_Townhouse. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. click Edit Walkthrough.rvt. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. double-click 1st Floor. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. under Floor Plans. click (Element Properties). press ESC. and click OK. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. under Extents.The walkthrough plays. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. clear Far Clip Active. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise.

6 On the Options Bar. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. select Path. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. 7 Click the third key frame position.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). You can move any camera target or key frame position. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. and drag it to the location shown. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. for Controls.

select <Shading>. c_Townhouse. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. 9 To play the walkthrough. 3 Under Format. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. for Frames/sec. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. shading with edges. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. hidden line. shading. and click Save. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. enter 15. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. or rendering. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. under Walkthroughs. The walkthrough is recorded. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. reducing the size of the image. When you export the walkthrough. click Edit Walkthrough. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. double-click Walkthrough 1.rvt. and click OK. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. click File menu ➤ Save As. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. under Output Length. 8 If you want to save this exercise. If you are unsure of what option to use. on the Options Bar. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. for Model Graphics Style. specifying the number of frames. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. and click OK. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. for Compressor. . select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system.

More specifically. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. In this tutorial. 431 . you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies.

4 On the View toolbar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. expand Views (all). 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. (SteeringWheels). as shown. click Training Files. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Creating a Solar Study . as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . expand Floor Plans. and double-click 01 Entry. A 3D view is created.Courtyard View In this exercise.rvt. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click shown. click Camera.

click Section. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. if necessary. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. 8 In the Rename View dialog. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename.Courtyard View.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. right-click 3D View 1. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. 9 On the File menu. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click OK. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. you create a section cutaway view. 3 On the Design Bar.5 On the Design Bar. click Save As. 7 In the Project Browser. enter Solar Study . double-click 01 Entry. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. expand 3D Views. under Floor Plans. as shown.

click . enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. double-click the section head. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 11 On the SteeringWheel. and click OK. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. click 10 On the View toolbar. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 13 On the Design Bar. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 6 To view the section. (SteeringWheels). as shown. click Modify. right-click Section 1.5 On the Design Bar. expand Sections. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. and click Rename. 7 In the Project Browser. click Modify.

and click Rename. you create a plan cutaway view. click Save. and click Rename. In some cases. 16 On the View Control Bar. double-click 01 Entry. under 3D Views. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. right-click {3D}. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. and click OK. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 .14 In the Project Browser. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. 15 In the Rename View dialog. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. under Floor Plans. and click OK. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. clear Section Boxes. 18 On the File menu. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. then Fine. Typical plan views. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. 17 To hide the section box. 4 In the Project Browser. click . as shown. then select Medium. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. and click OK. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. 6 In the Rename View dialog. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. 5 In the Project Browser. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. click Callout. including the house. On the Annotation Categories tab. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. do not display many elements in 3D. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. under Floor Plans. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse.

436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 16 On the View Control Bar. 15 Select the Roof. so you can see into the building from the top. 9 On the SteeringWheel. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. 11 On the Design Bar. click (SteeringWheels). as shown. click Modify. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. as shown.8 On the View toolbar.

Display study views 22 In the Project Browser.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. click Save. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . and preview the effects of each study as an animation. 21 On the File menu. under 3D Views. right-click {3D}. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . under 3D Views. 20 On the View Control Bar. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 19 In the Rename View dialog. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser.17 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename.

CA. and click Duplicate. 2 On the View Control Bar. you specify the location. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . or multi-day solar study. USA is selected. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. date range. for City. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. leave the slider at 50. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click . you specify the location. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation.Creating Solar Studies . You can create a still. . The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. click click OK. 10 Under Place. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. expand Views (all). and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. and time. select Los Angeles. and time range. expand 3D Views. Click the Single-Day tab. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. Los Angeles. single-day. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Name dialog.Boston. USA. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. 3 Select Cast Shadows. For the Single-Day solar study. click . date. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. 4 For Sun Position. For this study. enter Summer Solstice. For the Multi-Day solar study. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. MA. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project.

Clear Ground Plane at Level. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. For Time Range. Under Frame. 14 In this case. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 7 On the Options Bar. on the Single-Day tab. 16 In the Name dialog. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. click . verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. enter Winter Solstice. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Winter Solstice. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. click OK. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Save. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . for Sun Position. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. ■ For Time Interval. Los Angeles. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. 2008. 6 On the View Control Bar. for Date. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. and click OK. select December 22. enter 10 and press ENTER. Los Angeles is selected.Courtyard View is currently displayed. and click OK. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. 19 On the File menu.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. 2 On the View Control Bar. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . You can select the level to be used for shadow display. click . NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. click OK. under Frame. enter 20 and press ENTER. Los Angeles. 8 On the Options Bar. and click Duplicate. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. select June 22. 2008. confirm that Summer Solstice.

2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. . under Floor Plans. click OK. select Summer Solstice. and click OK. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. The solar study animation plays. . .rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. click To play the animation from start to finish. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. click . on the Single-Day tab. 14 On the Options Bar. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 13 On the View Control Bar. click . Los Angeles. click Text. double-click 01 Entry. for Sun Position. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. approximately as shown. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. click To display the next sequential frame. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. click . AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients.■ To display the next key frame. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar.

Click and enter Dining. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. click . On the Options Bar. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. click Lines. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. as shown. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 .■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. click . as shown. 5 In the Project Browser. 6 On the View Control Bar. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. approximately as shown. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. expand 3D Views. 8 For Sun Position.

if necessary. 15 To hide the section box. select Section Boxes. select the section box. and click OK. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Los Angeles. on the Single-Day tab. and click OK. 11 To display the section box. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. 14 Click outside of the section box. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. as shown. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 12 In the drawing area. select Summer Solstice. and click OK. clear Section Boxes. On the Annotation Categories tab. ■ For Frames per second.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and enter 5 to 50. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Output Length. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. click OK. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. select Frame Range. verify that the value is set to 15. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. On the Annotation Categories tab. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain.

To maintain the proportions of the frame. under Output Length. for Compressor. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. select Winter Solstice. Click OK. For File Name. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. you open each image. and click OK. and enter 5 to 10. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. verify that the value is set to 15. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. for Model Graphics Style. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. select Frame Range.Los Angeles. click OK. click . you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. for Model Graphics Style. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. For Files of Type. 3 For Sun Position. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. Under Format. For Frames per second. For Dimensions. To view the animation. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. enter 450 in the first field (width). 2 On the View Control Bar. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. select AVI Files. of the animation separately. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. verify that Hidden Line is selected. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. or frame. verify that Hidden Line is selected. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.■ ■ Under Format. and click OK. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. on the Single-Day tab. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . Los Angeles. 19 In the Video Compression dialog.

For Files of Type. click the Desktop icon.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. depending on the Frame Range. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. click Save.Los Angeles. under 3D Views. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. For File name. BMP. or any single-frame format. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. enter 450 in the first field (width). TIFF. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. Click OK. or GIF. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Click Save. such as JPEG. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped.■ For Dimensions. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. In this example. select PNG. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . as shown: 9 On the File menu.

Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 . NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. as shown. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts.2 Select the section box in the drawing area.

5 Select the roof. specify 2:00 pm. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. clear Section Boxes. 8 On the View Control Bar. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box.Boston. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 12 In the Name dialog. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . MA. For Time. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. and click OK. For Time Interval. click OK. USA. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. for Sun Position. select One week. click the Multi-Day tab. for File name enter 2pm . 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study .Los Angeles . On the Annotation Categories tab. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and click OK.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. and click Duplicate.Week Interval. and on the View Control Bar. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain.

rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Save. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. and click OK. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. for Compressor. and annotations in non-drafting views. for File Name. In the Length/Format dialog. Re-orienting the Project | 447 . you mirror all model elements. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson.West or North . click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. under Floor Plans. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. such as East .South. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. When you mirror a project. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). double-click 01 Entry. model views. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. click OK. 17 On the View Control Bar.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Click the Desktop icon.

right-click. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. In this exercise. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration.West axis. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. The project is mirrored along the East . select the roof. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project.West. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . under 3D Views. click OK. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 In the warning dialog. Then. 2 In the drawing area. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. For additional information. and click OK.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 6 On the Standard toolbar. select East .

on the Still tab. 12 Under Date and Time. 8 For Sun Position. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. change the time back to 12:00 PM. select Summer Solstice. and click OK. and click OK. click . click . Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. and select Winter Solstice. and click OK. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify 11:00 AM for time. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 11 For Sun Position. click . For example. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click the Still tab. click Apply. 10 Under Date and Time. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. select Cast Shadows. Orienting to True North | 449 .3 On the View Control Bar. 5 For Sun Position. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

click the Still tab. click OK. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. the view settings must be set for True North. and click OK. and click Properties. and click OK. double-click 01 Entry. 15 For Sun Position. click . IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. right click 01 Entry. When a project is started. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. select True North. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. This process establishes the view setting to True North. 19 In the Project Browser. for Orientation. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click OK. 14 On the View Control Bar.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and select Winter Solstice. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. 18 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.

The floor plan rotates in the view. click toward the top of the screen. ■ To establish the new direction of True North. Orienting to True North | 451 .■ To establish the True North direction. as shown. click above the end of the magenta line representing True North.

32 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. right-click. right-click 01 Entry. for Orientation. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click 01 Entry. and click Element Properties. 27 In the Rename View dialog. click . 24 In the Element Properties dialog. enter True North Orientation. under 3D Views. for Orientation. right-click. select Project North. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. select True North Orientation. select Summer Solstice. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.23 In the Project Browser. 25 In the Project Browser. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. and click OK. select True North. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. and click Apply. click the Still tab. 28 In the Project Browser. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Properties. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 33 For Sun Position. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. For File Name. For Files of Type.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. click the Single-Day tab. enter 600 in the first field. and click OK. under Format. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. Click Save. In the Length/Format dialog. Orienting to True North | 453 . and click OK. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. Click OK. verify that AVI Files is selected. for Compressor. click the Desktop icon. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. for Dimensions. Los Angeles. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Summer Solstice. click OK. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save.

(Show Rendering Dialog).Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. select Winter Solstice. For Sun. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Edit/New. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. 3 On the View Control Bar. and click Duplicate. capturing it. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. and exporting it as a JPEG image. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. Under Lighting. 2 In the Project Browser. for Setting. select 12/22.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. under 3D Views. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. In the Name dialog. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. and 2:00 PM. select Medium. Since a rendered image is temporary. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Date and Time. under Settings. select Interior: Sun only. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. under 3D Views. for Scheme. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . under Quality. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. and click OK. In this exercise. click Render. and click OK. Rendered views do not have this limitation. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering.

9 Click File menu ➤ Save. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. click Export. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. click Save to Project. and click Save. Rendering an Interior View | 455 . NOTE Rendered views are temporary.6 In the Rendering dialog. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. verify that JPEG Files is selected. click Desktop. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. enter living area_winter solstice. and click OK. For Files of type.

456 .

sections. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. and section boxes. or the client. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. They include rendering. an outside reviewer. linework. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. In this tutorial. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. When organizing presentation graphics. you explore the stylistic approach. For the realistic approach. Whether the audience is the general contractor. 457 . Using the pre-built building model. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. you can choose between realism and stylistics. and details. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. type. a consultant. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. In this series of exercises. length. Co-house. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. elevations. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. Other tools in the software. however. advanced model graphics.

To fit the floor plan into the analytique. you create a presentation floor plan. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. you create a copy of the plan. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and place the plan on a dark background for contrast.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson.

Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. 2 In the Project Browser. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. exit the menu.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. and click Rename. click Training Files.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Cnst. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. Cnst. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click in the drawing area. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. right-click 2nd Flr. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 .

UP Text. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. elevations. and other annotations in this view. this represents the view getting smaller. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 7 Under Visibility.rvt. This turns off the visibility of all tags. dimensions. and Up Arrow. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. click the Scale control and select 1:100. 8 Click OK. expand the Stairs category. 11 In the Save As directory.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. No annotations display in the view. click the Annotation Categories tab. navigate to the folder of your choice. sections. and click Save. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 12 Proceed with the next exercise. and clear DOWN Text. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. Down Arrow.

7 For Place. however. select Sun and Shadow Settings. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. Cnst. For Sun Position. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. you can select any city. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. click .Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. At that place. specify 35. click . If you select a different city. click OK. double-click it in the Project Browser. NOTE For this step. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. select By Date. and click OK. and select 1st Flr.rvt. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. The higher the number. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. MA. select Boston. the darker the shadows. modify. 12 Click OK. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 9 For City. click (Shadows Off). specify 10/27. ■ For Contrast. select Cast Shadows. 3 On the View Control Bar. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. 1:00 PM. click the Place tab. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. and click Advanced Model Graphics. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. 6 Under Settings. on the Still tab. you can create. for Date and Time. Time and Place. Within a project. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view.

Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. . 19 Proceed with the next exercise. click OK. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. clear Ground Plane at Level. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Settings. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. click (Shadows On). and click OK. for Sun Position. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast.

2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. The viewport displays at the cursor. and notice the view title. click Modify. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. select Arch Portrait. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. right-click the Design Bar.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Add View. and click to place it. and click OK. TIP If the View tab is not available. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 . 4 In the Views dialog. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. 6 On the Design Bar. click Sheet. and click View. and click Add View to Sheet.

click Duplicate. and click OK. for Show Title. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. 12 In the Name dialog. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. under Graphics. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. select No. and click OK. To accomplish this. For this analytique. click Edit/New. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. 9 On the Options Bar. and click Activate View. click .Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. enter Presentation. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. The viewport no longer displays a view title.

click Region Properties. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. 18 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Options Bar. and the boundary of the region. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. 22 On the Design Bar. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. select Invisible lines. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. If necessary. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. 17 In the Type Selector. click . click Edit/New. When you finish drawing the chain.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. click Filled Region. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. fill properties. click . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Chain. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections.

verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. and click OK. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 In the Name dialog. under Graphics. and click Deactivate View. under Identity Data. and click View Properties. and click OK. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. for Fill Pattern. and click OK. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. select Solid fill. click OK. enter Presentation. click . 26 In the Type Properties dialog. scroll down. and click OK. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. for Sheet Name.24 In the Type Properties dialog. under Name. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Solid Black. click Finish Sketch. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. click Duplicate. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. 35 Proceed with the next lesson.

rvt. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 . you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. right-click South. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

By changing the angle of the sun. scroll up. Time and Place. and click OK. 16 In the Name dialog. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 18 For Time. under Settings. exit the menu. select Cast Shadows. on the Model Categories tab. under Elevations. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand the Doors category. click (Shadows Off). click OK. and click OK. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. clear Visible. 12 Under Shadow. 13 For Contrast. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter Presentation South Elevation. select By Date. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 14 For Sun Position. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. and click OK. click in the drawing area. click Duplicate. and clear Show annotation categories in this view.2 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 9 Click OK. 11 On the View Control Bar. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under Visibility. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Override. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. specify 2:30 PM. under Visibility. and click Advanced Model Graphics. under Pattern Overrides. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and clear Elevation Swing. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. and click Rename. right-click Copy of South. specify 35. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click . click in the Walls row. and click OK.

Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise.Presentation. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . click Add View. and click Add View to Sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet.rvt. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. 3 In the Views dialog. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. 21 Proceed with the next exercise.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. double-click A105 .

The viewport displays a view title. The view title no longer displays. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Viewport : Presentation. 5 In the Type Selector.

You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . 7 On the Design Bar. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. 9 Proceed with the next lesson.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. click Modify.

472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique.rvt. and use the flip arrows if necessary. Cnst. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. 4 Add the section shown below. click Section. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click 1st Flr. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. for Scale.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). select 1: 100.

this view needs to be rotated 180°. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. To accomplish this. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. as shown. click Callout. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. expand Sections (Callout 1). for Scale. To fit correctly in the analytique.Section 2 is added to the building model. select 1 : 100. and double-click Section 2. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 .

scroll up. right-click Callout of Section 2. 12 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1). This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. enter Presentation Section 2. and click OK. 11 In the Rename View dialog. 10 In the Project Browser.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. under Sections (Callout 1). 17 Under Visibility. click Modify. click Override. 15 Under Visibility. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Pattern Overrides. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. clear Visible. and click OK. and clear Elevation Swing. click the Model Categories tab. double-click Presentation Section 2. and click Rename. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. expand the Doors category. click in the Walls row. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. click The crop regions no longer display.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. When you select the crop region. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . 24 Proceed with the next exercise. 22 On the View Control Bar. (Hide Crop Region). This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. 20 Click OK. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements.

specify the following: Under Shadow. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Click Apply. 3 On the View Control Bar. The shadows do not offer much contrast. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. click Duplicate.rvt. and click OK. ■ For Sun Position. For Contrast. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 6 In the Name dialog. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. in the Project Browser. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. 2 On the View Control Bar. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. double-click Presentation Section 2. under Sections (Callout 1). you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. select Cast Shadows. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. In addition. In the steps that follow. click . enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. specify 35.

10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Altitude. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. NOTE The line style. specify 70°. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. select Silhouette Edges. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . Silhouette Edges. specify 135°. for Silhouette style. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. click OK. Select Relative to View.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. was added to this training file for training purposes. For Azimuth. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. Click OK. and click OK. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. click (Shadows On). select Directly.

you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. and click to place the selected view. click Add View. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Presentation. under Sheets (all).rvt. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Views dialog. double-click A105 . and click Add View to Sheet. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. select Section: Presentation Section 2.

5 In the Type Selector. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. and press Enter. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. click Modify. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. double-click Section 2. click (Rotate). 8 Select the callout that you added previously. select Viewport : Presentation. The section needs to be rotated 180°. The view title no longer displays. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. 6 On the Design Bar. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. To rotate an object. under Sections (Callout 1). Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . Using a clock as a reference. you click to specify the start radius. In the steps that follow. 9 On the Edit toolbar.

The callout rotates 180°. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. under Sheets (all).Presentation. 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. double-click A105 . The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. After applying the view template to a new section view. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. and drag it up and to the left as shown. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. 15 On the Design Bar.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. click Modify. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 .

rvt. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 7 In the Rename View dialog. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. 6 In the Project Browser. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. under Sections (Callout 1). right-click Copy of Section 1. right-click Section 1. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. you can simply apply the presentation view template. enter Presentation Section 1.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Presentation Section 2. 4 In the View Templates dialog. 3 In the New View Template dialog. under Sections (Type 1). under Sections (Type 1). and click OK. and click Rename. click OK. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation. and click OK.

and click OK. 17 In the Element Properties dialog.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. under Graphics. lighting fixtures.Presentation. and click OK. select 90° Counterclockwise. 12 In the Views dialog. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. 15 Right-click the viewport. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. under Names. annotations. double-click A105 . select Presentation. and click Add View to Sheet. and elevation swings no longer display. select Viewport : Presentation. 14 In the Type Selector. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . for Rotation on Sheet. select Section: Presentation Section 1. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 18 Right-click the viewport. and click Deactivate View. under Sheets (all). The furniture. click Add View. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. and click Activate View.

Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. traditional analytiques contain a detail. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. In this exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. such as a tracery window or a column capital.

double-click Section 1. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Callout. under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Type 1). and click Rename. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. as shown. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. select the callout. After you add the callout. 4 In the Project Browser. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . click Modify. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. right-click Callout of Section 1.

under Extents. under Sections (Callout 1). enter Presentation Callout. 8 Right-click. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Select the crop region. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. and click OK. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . as shown. and click OK. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. and click View Properties. 6 In the Project Browser. double-click Presentation Callout. clear Annotation Crop.5 In the Rename View dialog. clear Crop Region Visible.

15 On the Design Bar. and click Activate View. select Section: Presentation Callout. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 . double-click A105 . For Scale Value 1. under Sheets (all). 14 In the Type Selector. 12 In the Views dialog. specify 22. Click OK. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. select Custom.Presentation. click Add View. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Viewport : Presentation. click Modify.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser.

24 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. click Edit/New. 23 On the Design Bar. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. click Filled Region. activate the viewport. double-click Presentation Callout. and make adjustments as necessary. and move it to the position shown below. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. and click Deactivate View. under Sections (Callout 1).19 Right-click the callout presentation view. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. click Region Properties. In the steps that follow. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. When finished.

under Sheets (all). click . You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. on the Design Bar. When you are finished. for Fill Pattern. click Finish Sketch. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Activate View. and click OK 3 times. double-click A105 . 28 In the Project Browser. 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar.25 In the Type Properties dialog. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. select Solid fill. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. click Filled Region.Presentation. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. You do not have to replicate the image exactly.

The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. click . 33 On the View Control Bar. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Finish Sketch.31 On the Options Bar. 32 On the Design Bar. and sketch the rectangle shown below. 34 Select the crop region. click (Show Crop Region).

You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. 38 Proceed with the next lesson.35 On the View Control Bar. and click Deactivate View. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . click (Hide Crop Region). Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491.

and apply shadows to the views. double-click Isometric. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 3 On the View Control Bar. click the Scale control.rvt. click (Shadows Off). and click Advanced Model Graphics. under 3D Views.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. and click 1 : 200. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . You then add each view to the presentation sheet. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. 5 On the View Control Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

select Section Box. select Cast Shadows. under Extents. double-click Isometric 2. Click OK. and click Rename. select Silhouette Edges. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. For Azimuth. specify 35. and click OK. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. in the list. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. For Altitude. under 3D Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under 3D Views.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. right-click Isometric. For Contrast. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . and click OK. select Directly. under 3D Views. enter Isometric 1. and click OK. specify 135°. Select Ground Plane at Level. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. Select 1st Flr. for Silhouette style. Cnst. and click OK. 14 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Project Browser. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. For Sun Position. 8 In the Name dialog. specify 45°. and click Rename. right-click Isometric 1. and click OK. click . click Duplicate. A section box displays around the building model. enter Isometric 2. 15 In the Rename View dialog. Select Relative to View. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. 12 In the Rename View dialog.

TIP Notice the rotation symbol. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. Grips display on each face of the section box. as shown. When you are finished. You can use this to rotate the section box.19 Select the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

double-click Isometric 3. enter Isometric 3. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. 25 To hide the section box. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 22 In the Project Browser. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. and click Rename. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. The section box no longer displays.Presentation. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Project Browser. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . the stairs and railings may display. 31 In the Project Browser. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. Next. double-click Isometric 2. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Viewport : Presentation.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. under Sheets (all). under 3D Views. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Rename View dialog. If desired. make a copy of the view. 27 Select the section box. On the Annotation Categories tab. under 3D Views. right-click Isometric 2. In the Type Selector. On the Annotation Categories tab. 24 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and click OK. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. clear Section Boxes. and click OK. 29 To hide the section box. clear Section Boxes. under 3D Views. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. click Modify on the Design Bar. you can adjust the plane location. under 3D Views. double-click A105 . When you are finished. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. The filled region partially covers the view.32 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation. In the Type Selector. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under 3D Views. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. 33 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. select Viewport : Presentation.

35 Select the poche filled region.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 39 For Background. for Fill Patterns. 41 On the Design Bar. 42 Using the drawing tools. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. click Edit/New. select Concrete. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . This will make it easier to draw lines. click Region Properties. The image below shows the redrawn lines. select Transparent. click Edit. On the Options Bar. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 On the Design Bar. and click Activate View. click Lines. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 40 Click OK twice. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process.

45 In the Type Properties dialog. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 44 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. click Edit/New. select Solid fill. for Fill Pattern. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. 46 Click OK twice. click Finish Sketch. click Region Properties. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport.43 On the Design Bar. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. 47 On the Design Bar.

The view opens immediately. under Floor Plans. click Camera. then you specify the eye direction and range. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. you add it to the presentation sheet. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. a cutaway perspective view. Cnst. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. you create the final view for the analytique. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. double-click 1st Flr.

and click OK. for Name. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 6 On the View Control Bar. click . 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . for Silhouette style. specify 35. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Silhouette Edges. For Contrast. For Sun Position. specify the following: Under Shadow. and click OK. select Cast Shadows. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. select Section Box. and click OK. under Extents. Grips display on each plane of the section box. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . 12 Select the section box. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. A section box now cuts through the building model.

under Sheets (all). 21 In the Project Browser. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 15 On the Options Bar. you must specify the actual size of the image. double-click A105 . and click OK. under 3D Views. click Size. select Viewport : Presentation.Presentation. 17 Under Model Crop Size. 18 On the View Control Bar. clear Section Boxes. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 19 To hide the section box. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. select Scale (locked proportions). Because scale does not apply to perspective views. On the Annotation Categories tab. In the Type Selector. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. enter 165 mm. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. for Width. and click OK. click (Hide Crop Region).14 Select the crop region. under Change.

23 Proceed with the next exercise. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. select the same font as the title. 3 On the Options Bar. specify a text size of 40 mm. click Edit/New. 6 In the Name dialog. enter Title. under Text. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Text. click . and click OK. double-click it in the Project Browser.rvt. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . click Duplicate. select a font. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. and click OK. under Text.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. enter Description. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. specify a text size of 6 mm. select Text : Title. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise.Presentation sheet is not the active view. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet.

17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 16 In the Type Selector. select Text : Description. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This completes the Presentation Views tutorial.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

Once the model has been imported.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. such as walls. and roofs. After you import the SketchUp model. that compose the building. 507 . curtain walls. you create a small building from the front mass form. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. In this tutorial. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. you can easily add detail with Revit components.

6 In the Save As dialog. you create a Revit Architecture project.skp. click Create Mass. For Import units. 9 In the informational dialog. right-click in the Design Bar. For Layers. For Files of type. and click Save. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. click OK. click Browse. and not in the library. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Click the Sketchup file. and click OK. click Training Files. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. select Auto-Detect. 10 In the Name dialog. 4 In the New Project dialog. click OK. select SketchUp Files.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. select All. select Preserve. click the Massing tab. under Template file. enter SketchUp Model.rte. 2 In the New Project dialog. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . visible elements. buildings. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Double-click the Common folder. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. enter Import SketchUp. For Colors. for File name. or select from a list.

Level 1 is the only choice. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. select Manual .Center. Click Open. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. ■ ■ For Positioning. 16 On the Design Bar. depending on the complexity of the project. click . Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. 17 In the warning dialog. click the Close button. In a new project. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. curtain walls. such as walls. and roofs. click Finish Mass. select Level 1. For Place at level. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. 14 On the View toolbar.

select the face so that it highlights in red. 3 In the Type Selector. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. and on the View Control Bar. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. verify Level 2 is selected.400mm displays. curtain walls. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. 4 On the Options Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. that compose the building. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. verify Basic Roof: Generic . click Roof by Face. such as walls. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . and when the cursor displays a plus sign. and roofs. for Level.18 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. After you create the building from the mass faces.

verify that Select Multiple is selected. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. click to display masses. 6 On the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. A roof is created from the mass face. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. 9 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. on the View toolbar. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. click Create Roof. To see the new roof. click Create Roof. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar.

click Roof by Face.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. click Create Roof. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 14 On the Options Bar. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel.

click Wall by Face. click roofs that you created. 23 On the Options Bar. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel.200mm displays. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. 16 On the View toolbar. to turn off the mass visibility in the view.15 On the Design Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. for Loc Line. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 21 On the Design Bar. verify Basic Wall: Generic . 22 In the Type Selector. select Core Face: Exterior. click Modify to end the command.

514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 28 In the Type Selector. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. 25 On the View toolbar. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar.24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. click to view only the walls and roofs. click Curtain System by Face.

32 On the View toolbar. 31 Using the same technique.30 On the Options Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 . 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click Create System. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel.

click Curtain System. click Roof by Face. 38 Select the mass face shown below.35 On the Design Bar. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. click Create System. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. and select it. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . select the other wall. click Wall by Face. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. click Create Roof. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar.

double-click Level 1. 43 Click to redisplay the masses.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. click Camera. specify a point to place the camera. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. click to view the building that you have created. under Floor Plans. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. click Wall by Face. Below the right corner of the view. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . and select the mass face shown below. 42 On the View toolbar. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser.

click your building in the view. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. The perspective view created by the camera displays. specify a point for the camera target. roofs.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. as shown. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 48 On the View toolbar. to view only the walls. Click the frame to display its grips. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again.

Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Click OK. Under Grid 1 Pattern. click . Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . Under Grid 2 Pattern. 50 On the Options Bar. for Justification. select Center. for Justification. select Center. click Modify. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. and select the left curtain system in the view.

Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. 55 Right-click. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. and move the roof edges as shown below. 63 In the Type Selector. double-click {3D}. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel.54 Select each roof to display its grips. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 59 On the View toolbar. 56 In the Project Browser. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click Door. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under 3D Views. double-click 3D View 1. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . and click Cancel to end the command. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

64 Add doors to the building as shown below. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 . 65 Save and close the drawing.

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. Like windows. Like walls. you need to change the length of the wall. panel. and mullions. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. grid lines. you need to select a panel.rvt. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. To change grids. 525 . To switch panel types. and they are not windows. and you can change these elements individually. you create a curtain system using the wall command. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. This affects the entire curtain system. to resize the system. Unlike windows. you select the grid. For example. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. click Training Files. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. or you can use a specific curtain system command. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. click Wall.1 In the Project Browser. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. and double-click Ground Floor.

10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. and double-click Southeast Isometric. Creating an Entrance | 527 . expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 8 In the Project Browser.

top constraint. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. Click OK. For Top Offset. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. and click (Properties). enter 1200.11 Select the curtain system. and room bounding. top and base attachments. 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. using curtain grids. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel.

25 On the Design Bar. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. double-click GROUND FLOOR. click Modify. and resize the crop boundary as shown. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. click Elevation. 20 In the drawing area.a. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. right-click Elevation 1 . and click Rename. Creating an Entrance | 529 .Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. click Curtain Grid.

or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. click Curtain Grid. FIFTH FLOOR. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. click Modify. Click to place another grid line. and SEVENTH FLOOR. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. Click to create a vertical grid. FOURTH FLOOR. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. 33 On the Design Bar. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and click OK. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. while pressing CTRL. one larger than the other. THIRD FLOOR.26 While pressing CTRL. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. SIXTH FLOOR. select SECOND FLOOR.

The two segments are removed. Creating an Entrance | 531 . You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. Instead of using the Door command. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. click Add or Remove Segments. The segment line style changes to dashed. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel.Next. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. you add a doorway to the curtain system. and then select the segment above it. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. and on the Options Bar. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view.

41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 39 On the Design Bar. and lock them. select One Segment. 42 Place dimensions as shown. click Curtain Grid.38 Using the same method. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 40 On the Options Bar. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step.

Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. click in any white space to exit the editor. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. Creating an Entrance | 533 . click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. 43 Delete the dimensions. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. Use the following image as a guide. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid).

Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. This changes the graphics style of the Next. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. not as curtain panels. 52 On the Type Selector. . click Training Files. 57 On the View Control Bar. 55 In the Project Browser. double-click Entrance Elevation. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. click view. and click Wireframe. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. 56 In the Project Browser. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Now. on the new curtain system you added.rfa. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. under Floor Plans. under Elevations. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . The panel changes to a double door.Next. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. 54 On the Design Bar. These panels schedule as doors. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. They are part of the curtain panel category. click Modify.

Creating an Entrance | 535 . and the solid panels display in white. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe.60 On the Type Selector. click . 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. The glazed panels display in blue. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. click System Panel : Solid. 63 Click OK twice. 65 On the View Control Bar. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. 61 With the panel still selected.

1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rvt. select Grid Line Segment. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Entire Grid Line. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. click Save As. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. 2 On the Options Bar. click Mullion. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .68 On the File menu.

12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. so you remove them next. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . clickModify. You are going to change some mullion joins. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. there are a few that you do not want.6 On the Options Bar. 10 Delete the mullions below them. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. however. because their width reduces the size of the doors. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. select All Empty Segments.

13 Click the lower mullion join control. Finally. 16 In the Project Browser. you can also right-click. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. 15 On the Design Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. 14 Click the top mullion control. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. 17 Save the file. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. click Modify. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion.Two mullion join controls display.

Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 4 In the Type Selector. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. double-click GROUND FLOOR. Curved Curtain System | 539 . you add a curtain system using the wall command. under Floor Plans. For Top Offset. 7 On the Options Bar. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . You also create a custom curtain panel for the system.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. 1 In the Project Browser. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. enter 1200. click Wall. Finally. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. for Top Constraint. Click OK. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. (Arc passing through three points). select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1.

You are going to use one of these snaps points. under Elevations. Divide the halves into quarters. and then sixteenths. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. Next. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. eighths. click Curtain Grid. you place grids on the system. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click East. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .

300mm. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Next. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. select the bottom layer of panels.15 Zoom in to the cylinder. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. to filter out all 19 Save the file. 16 On the Design Bar. you change some panels in the system. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. 18 In the Type Selector. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. select Basic Wall: Generic . Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. click Modify. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 .

click . 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. 3 In the Project Browser. and click OK. . click Model Lines. 8 On the Design Bar. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. double-click Exterior. 4 On the Design Bar. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . for Depth.rft. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. 12 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. 6 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. and on the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. select Glass. clear Chain. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 11 On the Design Bar. enter 100. click Lines. 5 On the Design Bar.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 9 Select the extrusion. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. and click .

22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. right-click. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid.Pattern. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 19 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Type Selector. select Curtain Panel . 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. and return to the project file. 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system.Pattern. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. click (Default 3D View). 24 On the View toolbar.rfa family. and click Change Walls Orientation. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . click Modify.Pattern. under Floor Plans. 23 Right-click. (SteeringWheels).rfa. click 25 On the View toolbar. and save the family as Curtain Panel .14 On the Design Bar. All fourth floor panels are selected.

double-click FIFTH FLOOR. 29 In the Type Selector. right-click. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc. All the panels change to the solid panel.Solid. All fifth floor panels are selected. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. under Floor Plans.The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 27 In the Project Browser. 30 Save the file. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. select System Panel .

click Lines. click ■ ■ For Sides. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. enter 8. and select it. Click again to specify the ending point. 1 In the Project Browser. for Profile Usage.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Select Radius. click Training Files. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. . except at the GROUND FLOOR level. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. and click OK. double-click East. under Elevations. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. select Mullion. click Mullion. and enter 50 mm for the radius.rft. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. 8 On the Design Bar. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. For vertical mullions. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 .

and click OK. click Mullion. 19 On the Design Bar.detail. 20 Select the detail component.11 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. double-click Southeast Isometric. click Training Files. click Visibility. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system.rfa family. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 27 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . clear Fine. clear Coarse and Medium. it can be added as a mullion type. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog.rfa. click Modify. 31 Click . click (SteeringWheels). After the new profile is loaded. and return to the project file. 17 On the Design Bar. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. under 3D Views. and click Visibility. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. 13 On the Options Bar. 28 On the View toolbar. click Modify.

You have placed more mullions than you want. 40 On the Design Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 43 Press DELETE.32 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 44 Save the file. so you remove the unwanted ones. 36 Under Construction. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 38 On the Options Bar. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. click Duplicate. click Modify. 33 Click Edit/New. and click OK. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. under Floor Plans. right-click. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . select All Empty Segments. for Profile. select Circular Mullion for Family. 41 In the Project Browser. 37 Click OK twice.

make custom curtain panels and mullions. you learned to create a curved curtain system. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Pick Walls. select Defines slope. and a ruled curtain system. and you can click to select them all. 1 In the Project Browser. All the inside faces highlight.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. double-click TOP OF ROOF. a storefront system. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. and then apply those custom elements to the system. and press TAB. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. 5 On the Options Bar. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. In this lesson. under Floor Plans. TIP To chain select all the walls.

14 On the Options Bar. enter 600. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. click Finish Roof.7 On the Design Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Roof Properties. 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Click OK. 18 Save the file. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Sloped Glazings | 549 . double-click Southeast Isometric. 16 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Project Browser. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. select Entire Grid Line. 11 On the View Control Bar. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. under 3D Views. click Mullion.

select Curtain Wall : Storefront. double-click GROUND FLOOR. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. click Wall. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Options Bar. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Unconnected for Height. and enter 2400. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. under Floor Plans. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline.Storefront System In this exercise. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. even if the wall height changes. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. under 3D Views. 9 On the Design Bar. enter 10200 mm. Storefront System | 551 . 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. and press ENTER. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. double-click Southeast Isometric. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. To see how the grid layout is defined. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. For this wall. which is specified in the type. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. 8 Click the temporary dimension. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. click Modify. This specifies an exact length for the wall. 12 Select the storefront wall. click Edit/New. 10 In the Project Browser. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. and click .

For more information about these curtain wall parameters. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. select All Empty Segments. 1 In the Project Browser. By setting the Angle value. 18 On the Options Bar. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. click Mullion. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . center. see the Revit Architecture help. Angle. you find Number. In this exercise. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. or end. double-click Southeast Isometric. enter 15. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. Justification. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. 20 Save the file. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. and Offset. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 16 Click OK. 19 Select a curtain grid. under 3D Views.

3 On the View Control Bar. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. and highlight the model line. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. Curtain System by Lines | 553 . 6 Click the highlighted line.

554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. A panel between the 2 lines is created. 11 Click OK. click Curtain Grid. and click . NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. 9 On the Design Bar. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. 10 Select the panel. Next. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall.8 Select the highlighted line. click Modify.

and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. right-click. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. and define a ruled curtain system. quarters. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. and then eighths. 16 In the Type Selector. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. Finally. select System Panel : Solid. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. quarters. 18 Save the file. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . embed a curtain system inside another wall. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. and then eighths. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels.

556 .

rvt. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009.Roofs 15 In this lesson. mansard. gable. In addition. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Before you can sketch the roof profile. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. You do not need to create the work plane. and open Metric\m_Roofs. shed. you learn to create several different types of roofs. and soffits to the roofs that you create. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise. In this tutorial. including hip. and low sloped roofs. gutters. you learn how to add fascia. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. In this lesson. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. 557 . click Training Files.

3 In the Work Plane dialog. centerline. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. select Name. and double-click Level 1. click Ref Plane. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. and so on). verify Level 3 is selected for Level. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. and click OK. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. 5 In the Go To View dialog. 4 Click OK. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway.1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. click the blue square on the witness line. expand Views (all). 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline.

11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 .9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face.

15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . sketch the roof profile. click Lines. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 16 On the View toolbar. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 13 On the Options Bar.Next. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. select Chain. click (Default 3D View) to display the model.

click Modify. expand Sections (Type 1). 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Next. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 17 On the Tools toolbar. 19 On the Tools toolbar.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. 21 In the Project Browser. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . The roof should resemble the following illustration. press CTRL. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. expand Views (all). 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. and then select the exterior face of the wall. press TAB. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. 18 Select the edge of the roof. and select the second wall. and double-click Section 1.

click Attach for Top/Base. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof.24 On the Options Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 26 On the View toolbar. click model. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint.

Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.rvt. click Pick Walls. and enter 600 for Overhang. 3 In the Project Browser. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. verify that Defines slope is selected. and double-click Garage Roof. Next. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . expand Floor Plans. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 On the Options Bar. and click Yes. m_Roofs. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. sketch the roof footprint.

By default. and on the Options Bar. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. click (Properties). 8 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 15 On the View toolbar. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. click Modify. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. clear Defines slope. click the model. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. Next. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs .7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. 13 On the Design Bar. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. click Finish Roof. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. 11 Press CTRL. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. select both slope definition lines. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 14 When you see the informational dialog. under Dimensions.

When you complete the roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. press TAB. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. m_Roofs. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . and enter 600 for Overhang. clear Defines slope. and double-click Level 3.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. click Pick Walls. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all).

15 On the Options bar. click Lines. sketch the chimney opening.6 Click to select all the walls. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . select Defines Slope. Next. 13 On the Options Bar. Next. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. click Modify. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the View menu. add new slope lines to the roof. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 Using automatic snaps. 17 When you see the informational dialog. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. select Defines Slope. click Finish Roof. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 8 On the Options Bar. click (Rectangle). click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan.

and enter 600 for Overhang. click Pick Walls. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. select Defines slope. and double-click Level 2. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.18 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. m_Roofs. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.rvt. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all).

11 To trim the first line segment. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . clear Defines Slope. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. and click (Pick Lines). Next. click Lines. 9 On the Tools toolbar. click (Trim/Extend). You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 7 On the Options Bar. close the roof sketch. 10 On the Options Bar. using the following illustration for guidance. Next. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. select the left vertical slope definition line.

Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. click (SteeringWheels). 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 17 On the View toolbar. click Finish Roof. 16 On the View toolbar.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. click Modify. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. and click OK. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. 18 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 14 Under Constraints. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. click Roof Properties. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar.

use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. Next. 23 On the Tools toolbar. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. join the two remaining walls to the roof.21 Click (SteeringWheels).

m_Roofs. enter 0 for Overhang. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. and double-click Level 2. clear Defines Slope. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select the left vertical roof line. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. expand Views (all). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. click (Trim/Extend). 10 To trim the first line segment. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. and enter 300 for Overhang. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . Next.rvt. 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 1 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Tools toolbar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 9 On the Options Bar. press TAB. click Pick Walls. 4 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint.

select Defines slope. click Roof Properties. 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. m_Roofs. click 20 On the View toolbar.rvt. 13 On the Options Bar. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. expand Views (all). Next. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 16 Under Constraints. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. expand 3D Views. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and double-click 3D. you add a slope-defining line. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. 19 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). and press ENTER. click Modify. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise.

click Split Walls and Lines. 9 On the Tools menu. click Ref Plane. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. 7 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. expand Views (all). 5 On the View menu. 14 On the Options Bar. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 2. click (Pick Lines). To help locate the position of each split. add two new slope arrows. Before you can add slope arrows. 4 In the Project Browser. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. click Modify. Next. Next. expand Floor Plans. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. and enter 600 for Offset.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. 11 On the Design Bar. clear Defines Slope. click Slope Arrow. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. you need to add two reference planes. 3 On the Options Bar.

Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. When eave heights differ. expand Views (all). and click 19 Under Constraints.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. click Edit. 20 Under Dimensions. select both slope arrows. enter 500 for Rise/1000. 18 Press CTRL. 16 Repeat steps 13 . and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. (Properties). the adjacent eave heights must align. select Slope for Specify. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise.15 to add the second slope arrow. m_Roofs. expand Floor Plans. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. and then click OK. click Modify. When you sketch a hip roof. and double-click Garage Roof. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. and move the cursor to place the arrow. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Begin the tail at the right reference plane.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays.

Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Next. 10 On the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . click Finish Roof. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. 12 On the Design Bar. 14 If you want to save your changes. 5 On the Options Bar. under Dimensions. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. (Properties). 13 On the View toolbar. click Align Eaves. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. When aligning eaves. select a method to align the eaves. on the File menu. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save As. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. The eave lines display with a dimension. select Defines Slope.

Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. click Modify. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs .rvt. 1 In the Project Browser.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. under Constraints. expand Views (all). and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. expand Elevations. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. (Properties). and double-click North. click Training Files. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. 3 Select the roof and. In the left pane of the Open dialog. on the Options Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.

6 On the View toolbar. click Lines. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. and click OK. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Floor Plans. and select the remaining three lines. click . 10 On the Options Bar. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . and then select Defines slope. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. under Dimensions. click (Pick Lines). Next. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. click Modify. 7 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). press TAB. 14 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. and double-click Level 3.

you add a roof to a building shell. After you add the roof. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. on the File menu. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Save As. click mansard roof. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units.17 On the View toolbar. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. click Training Files.

under Floor Plans. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. 5 In the drawing area. click Pick Walls. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . 4 On the Options Bar.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. verify that Defines slope is not selected. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. double-click Roof. 3 On the Design Bar.

11 On the Design Bar. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. select Steel Truss .Because the walls are not continuous.Insulation on Metal Deck . click Finish Roof. 7 On the Tools toolbar. click (Trim/Extend). and click OK. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop.EPDM. for Type.

You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. double-click Roof. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. and click to select it. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . 16 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. double-click the section head to open the section view. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. The roof has been created. In the next steps. click (Draw Split Lines). 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof.

move the cursor horizontally to the left. 18 Move the cursor down. and select a point on the opposite roof line. 20 Using the same method.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center.

You modify the points individually. exact placement of the points is not important. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab.The roof is now divided into 6 sections. Next. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. In this exercise. on the Options Bar. click (Modify Sub-Elements). (Add points). 23 On the Options Bar.

25 Using the same method. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. enter -2''. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. for the dimension. click (Modify Sub-Elements). and press ENTER. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape.24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof.

Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . 31 Select the roof slab. and press ENTER. click Modify. including the interior edges of the roof regions.27 Press and hold CTRL. and on the Options Bar. enter 4''. 29 On the Design Bar. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. click (Properties). for Elevation. and select all of the roof edges.

gutters. and soffits.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. 35 Click OK 3 times. After you create a roof. for Structure. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. for the Thermal/Air Layer. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. click Save As. Creating Fascia. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . In some cases this type of slope is desired. click Edit/New. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. and soffits in Revit Architecture. select Variable. and Soffits In this lesson. 36 View the results in the section view. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. Gutters. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. The entire slab is sloped. By making the insulation layer variable. and Soffits on page 586. on the File menu. under Construction. Creating Fascia. you can easily create its fascia. you learn how to create roof fascia. gutters. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Gutters. 37 If you want to save your changes.

rvt.rfa. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. and click OK. and click OK twice. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Press CTRL. under Construction. click Duplicate. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Name dialog. click (Properties). click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Training Files. and open Common\c_Condominium. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . and click Open. 5 On the Options Bar. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. select M_Fascia-Built-Up.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. enter Built-up Fascia.

you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model.rvt. click (Properties). 14 Proceed to the next exercise.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. Creating Gutters In this exercise. 13 On the Design Bar. Creating Gutters on page 588. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. c_Condominium. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. 2 On the Options Bar. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

Creating Gutters | 589 . 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. click in the Value field for Material. and click OK three times. . and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. Creating Soffits on page 590. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile.3 In the Properties dialog. under Construction. 10 Click to place the gutter. click Duplicate. select Metal-Aluminum for Name.

You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. expand Views. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit.Creating Soffits In this exercise. you learn how to place a roof soffit. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Roof. c_Condominium. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Design Bar. click Pick Roofs.

and then select the soffit to join them. expand Views (all). 8 Select the roof.4 Select the roof. Creating Soffits | 591 . 7 On the Tools menu. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. click Join Geometry. 6 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. expand 3D Views. and double-click 3D. 5 On the Design Bar.

10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.9 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. click Save As. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and save the exercise file with a unique name.

select Square meters. For Unit Suffix. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Common\c_Area. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. 3 Under Area. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. select Millimeters. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. click Training Files. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. Click OK.rvt. In the final exercise. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. your values will be different.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. Finally. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. 2 In the Project Units dialog. click Project Units. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. under Length. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. 593 . If you are using metric units. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. select mm. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas.

and click Room and Area. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). right-click in the Design Bar. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. click Settings. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. or 0. select m2. click OK. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. it is not necessary in this exercise. click the Room Calculations tab. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. For Unit Suffix. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. 9 Click Cancel. Click OK. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. select 2 decimal places. click the Area Schemes tab. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. 4 In the Project Units dialog. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . expand Floor Plans. the system-computed height defaults to the level.■ ■ ■ For Rounding. These schemes define spatial relationships. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable.

If you select No. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. click Area. 12 When the informational dialog displays. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. 13 In the Project Browser.Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. When you select Yes in this dialog. under Views (all). you must manually add these boundary lines. rather than the area tag. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. Click OK. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. you must select one of the reference lines. click Area Plan. forming a closed loop. To modify the area. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''.

click Area Boundary. common areas. you can either draw them or pick them. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. 21 On the Options Bar. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Expand Area Plans (Rentable). Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. If you do not select this option. Click OK. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. and store area. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. you create a new area plan for rentable space. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. Next. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. When you pick the walls. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. When you add area boundary lines. click Area Plan.

click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. 27 On the Options Bar. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click ■ ■ . Select Office area for Area Type. click Modify. click Area. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. 25 On the Design Bar. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. and click to select the area. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model.23 On the Design Bar.

598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . click Modify and select the area. 29 On the Design Bar. Select Building Common Area for Area Type.■ Click OK. click ■ ■ ■ . 32 On the Options Bar. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. In the Element Properties dialog. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. click Area. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. Select Office area for Area Type. Click OK. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. 31 On the Design Bar.

36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . and select Store Area for Area Type. enter Core for Name.■ Click OK. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. 35 Add an area to the building model core.

and click to place the legend. In this exercise. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and click Save.Notice that within the two store areas. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . In the next exercise. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. click Save. 37 On the File menu. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. name the project Area-in progress. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. click Color Scheme Legend. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory.rvt. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces.

click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. click Schedule/Quantities. select Area Type and click Add. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. click the Fields tab. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. and click OK. select Areas (Rentable). under Category. 7 Under Available fields. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the New Schedule dialog.3 When the dialog displays.

The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule. 602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .9 Click OK.

floor. and perimeter information. you then need to update the building face. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. In this tutorial. and floors. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. building elements. and roofs. you can specify the view to display massing elements. After you make building elements. At any time. floors. After creating mass floors. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. curtain systems. You assign the default wall. 603 . the building model uses those element types to define the walls. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. If you modify a massing face. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. or both. volume. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. roofs. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. Using Massing Tools In this lesson.

click Create Mass. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Views (all). 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. double-click Level 1. click Training Files. and cutting geometry. sweeps. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing .rvt. and click Massing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. select Mass (Opaque). 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Materials dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and click OK. under Constraints. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Lines. click Finish Sketch. (Line). enter 25000. click (Default 3D View). click 18 On the Options Bar. for Name. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. under Views (all). 13 On the View toolbar. for Offset. and on the Options Bar. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. click Extrusion Properties.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click the value for Material. double-click Level 1. under Materials and Finishes. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. click Lines. and click OK. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . enter 1550 mm. 8 On the Design Bar. 15 On the View Control Bar. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. and click . for Extrusion End. (Pick Lines).

28 On the Design Bar. The second form is on top of the first form. highlight the larger form. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. and click OK. 26 In the Project Browser. enter 25000. click Finish Sketch. 23 In the Materials dialog. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. for Name. enter 27500. under Materials and Finishes. and click . TIP If necessary. double-click West. and click OK. click Extrusion Properties. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . 24 In the Element Properties dialog. for Extrusion End. click the value for Material.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. press TAB to highlight the entire face. and click OK. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. select Pick a plane. under Views (all). for Extrusion Start. under Views (all). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. 25 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click {3D} to see the results. select Mass (Transparent). 21 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. 30 In the drawing area.

click (Draw). you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . Next. click (Arc passing through three points). and clear Chain. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown.31 Click to select the face. 34 On the Options Bar. click Lines. and click to select the line start point. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. and on the Options Bar. (Pick Lines). 37 On the Options Bar.

click the arrow next to the drawing options. click Modify. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. under Views (all). Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. click Edit Top. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . and delete the vertical construction line. 46 On the Design Bar. 45 In the Project Browser. 41 On the Edit toolbar.TIP If you do not see this option. 39 On the Design Bar. click (Move). 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. double-click East. on the Options Bar. (Line). under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Lines and. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown.

verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. (Arc passing through three points).48 On the Options Bar. click Blend Properties. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. for Material. 50 On the Design Bar. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. 52 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 53 On the View toolbar. and that -92000 is specified for Second End. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. click 49 Create an arc as shown. click (Default 3D View). In this exercise. In the next exercise. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . click Finish Sketch.

as shown. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the drawing area. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. under Floor Plans.rvt. 7 Using the same technique. m_Massing_Start. click Lines. and select Chain. 4 On the Options bar. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. click (Line). When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 9 On the Design Bar. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. under Views (all). click Ref Plane. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. 10 On the Options Bar. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. 1 In the Project Browser. select the mass.

17 On the View toolbar. 15 Click OK.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. click (Default 3D View). enter 0. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. When sketching each extrusion. click Extrusion Properties. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. 13 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Finish Sketch. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. 16 On the Design Bar. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. for Extrusion End. 14 Under Constraints. snap the corners to the intersections. on the View Control Bar. Using Swept Blends | 611 . and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. In this exercise.

612 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Sketch 2D Path. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points).NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. select a point below the mass elements. double-click Level 1. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. m_Massing_Start. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. under Floor Plans. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass.rvt. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. ■ For the radius. and click Lines.

click (Rectangle). 11 On the Options Bar. verify that <By Sketch> is selected. click Lines. click (Default 3D View). and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. click Finish Path. 6 On the Design Bar. The only way to align these elements is visually. 8 On the Design Bar. as shown. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. Using Swept Blends | 613 . and click Edit. click Profile 1. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend.

click Finish Profile. 17 Using the same method. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. and press ESC. click Profile 2. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar.13 On the Tools toolbar.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. 15 On the Design Bar. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. click (Align). 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges.

22 Click OK twice. 23 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. and click . 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Profile. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. Using Swept Blends | 615 . select Mass (Transparent). click Swept Blend Properties.18 On the Design Bar. click Finish Swept Blend. click <By Category>.

click Finish Mass. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. In this exercise. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . Finally. you create new family types from a mass family file.24 On the Design Bar.rvt.

In this exercise. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. and click Apply. 6 For Width. for Height. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. for Depth. enter 46000mm. enter 18000 mm. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 18000 mm. and click Apply. 2 In the Family Types dialog. enter 15000mm. click New. 9 Click OK. enter 11000 mm. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . enter 6000 mm. and for Name. under Other. for Height. and for Name. click Family Types. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. 5 Click New.rfa. enter 12000 mm. enter 68000 mm.rfa. for Depth. click Training Files. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. and click OK. and click OK. for Height. and click Apply. enter 9000 mm. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. for Depth. for Width. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 8 For Width. and click OK. 7 Click New. 3 In the Name dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

and Triangle. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Views (all). 1 If not already selected.rfa. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing .rvt.rfa. 6 Open the Box-Training. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. as shown.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. click Training Files. double-click Site. 3 On the View Control Bar. on the View toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. You also load other existing mass families and place them. click Training Files. Semi Barrel Vault. click Place Mass. Arc Dome. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.rfa. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place.rfa family files. 8 In the Type Selector. 2 In the Project Browser. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model.

23 On the Options Bar. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. specify Mass (Transparent). Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . and click to place the mass. and click OK twice. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and click (Element Properties). 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 11 Select the box. select the 3 boxes. for the Material parameter. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. select Rotate after placement. specify Mass (Opaque). 16 On the Design Bar. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. for the Material parameter. 20 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 24 On the Design Bar. enter 90 for Angle. as shown. 17 Press CTRL. click Place Mass. select the triangle. click Place Mass. click Modify. and click OK twice. 14 In the Type Selector.10 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. click (Element Properties). 25 In the drawing area.

32 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties).26 Select the triangle. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. for the Material parameter. and click OK twice. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and click (Element Properties). click (Default 3D View). 30 Place the box mass family as shown. specify Mass (Transparent). for the Material parameter. click Place Mass. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click OK twice. specify Mass (Opaque). select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 33 On the View toolbar. 29 In the Type Selector.

Joining Mass Elements | 621 .rvt file. (Join Geometry). You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. In the next exercise. click (Default 3D View). you join these mass elements. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. In this exercise. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. NOTE When you join geometry. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place.

4 Select the triangle. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Floor Plans. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. under Views (all). Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. click (Mirror). on the Edit toolbar. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown.

as shown. (Join Geometry). click 14 On the Tools toolbar. Joining Mass Elements | 623 . 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first.8 On the Options Bar. click (Draw). 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. enter SM. and then select the triangle. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. 17 Press ESC to see the result. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. click (Default 3D View). Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. for Axis. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection.

click Modify. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. 2 On the Window menu. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place.In this exercise. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. click (Add to Design Option Set).) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing .rvt. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. (If Design Options is already selected. and select the triangle mass element. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. you joined mass elements together. 1 On the Design Bar. do not clear the check mark.

and click (Element Properties). 5 In the Project Browser. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. under Views (all). click Place Mass. 7 In the Type Selector. enter 90. clear Curved. 8 On the Options Bar. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. specify Mass (Transparent). and click OK twice. click Modify. for the Material parameter. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 14 In the drawing area. click Place Mass. 13 On the Design Bar. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. 10 On the Options Bar. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. select Rotate after placement. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . double-click Site. and click OK. under Floor Plans. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. for Angle. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select Sloped (primary). 17 In the Type Selector.

26 On the Design Options toolbar. select the three arc domes. TIP To find the correct shapes. While pressing CTRL. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. under 3D Views. specify Mass (Transparent). 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. under Elevations.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. double-click {3D}. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. 19 On the Design Bar. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 22 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. 23 On the View Control Bar. for the Material parameter. click (Add to Design Option Set). 21 In the Element Properties dialog. and watch the status bar. under Views (all). Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. 28 In the Project Browser. clear Sloped. and click (Element Properties). double-click North. and click OK twice. select Curved. click Modify. under Views (all). 20 In the drawing area.

Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. and click OK. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. under Option. 31 Click the value for Design Option. and click Close. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options.rvt. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. click (Design Options). 33 In the Design Options dialog. click the Design Options tab. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. select Curved from the Design Option menu. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . In this exercise. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. select Curved and. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 35 On the File menu. click Make Primary. 34 Close the warning that displays. you can make it the primary option. you placed mass elements into Design Options.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson.

and for Loc Line. under Views (all). Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. click Training Files. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. 6 On the Options Bar. click (Pick Faces). 1 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face.rvt. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. 5 In the Type Selector. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. select Basic Wall: Exterior .Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. 2 On the View toolbar. double-click {3D}. select Wall Centerline. you pick massing faces to create walls.Brick on CMU. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model.

NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. under Floor Plans. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 8 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). under Views (all). click Wall by Face. under Views (all). Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . 9 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 5. 16 In the Type Selector. click Wall by Face.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. under Floor Plans. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 15 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. double-click Level 3. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. under Floor Plans. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. click Wall by Face. double-click Level 1. 14 In the Project Browser. select Curtain Wall : Storefront.

18 Select all the faces shown in red. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. If desired. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. 20 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all). 21 On the Design Bar. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. 19 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Floor Plans. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. double-click Level 9. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.

When you select levels. and click OK. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 .In this exercise. perimeter. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. Curtain Systems. click Modify. click Mass Floors. 4 Click OK. 8 On the Design Bar. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. under Views (all). 6 On the Options Bar. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 1 In the Project Browser. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. and exterior surface area. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. select all levels.rvt. double-click {3D}. and Walls. 3 On the Model Categories tab. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. clear Curtain Panels. volume. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

and click OK.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. select Levels 1-4. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. click Mass Floors. 11 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 13 On the Design Bar. 10 Press CTRL. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown.

The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). select Level 1. 15 Press CTRL. 16 On the Options Bar.14 On the Options Bar. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. and click OK. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . click Mass Floors.

3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and select Level. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. and click OK. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. 4 Using the same method. and click Add. under Available fields. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects.In this exercise. select Mass Floor. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. Floor Volume. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). schedules can be created using the mass floors. Floor Perimeter. select Floor Area.rvt. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. under Category. press and hold SHIFT. The Floor Area. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

and click OK.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. select Mass: Family and Type. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . The Mass Floor Schedule displays. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. for Usage. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. enter Retail. for Sort by.

select Mass: Family and Type. click Edit. 14 Select Level. for Fields. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Move Up until Usage is listed first.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. under Scheduled fields (in order). and click Remove. and click Properties. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. under Other. expand Schedules/Quantities. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. 13 With Usage selected. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. After you assign usage.

select Usage. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. enter Hotel. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). click Edit. 22 In the Project Browser. 19 Click OK twice. click Edit. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 24 In the Project Browser. and select Grand totals. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. for Filter. for Then by. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. and click OK. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. and click Properties. select Floor Area. and click OK. for Filter by. under Other. for Field formatting. in the field under Filter by. select Calculate totals. and click Rename. select Level. elevation.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and plan views. 23 In the Rename View dialog. for Sort by. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. under Fields. 27 Click OK twice. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. select Usage. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and in the field below. 16 On the Formatting tab. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Filter tab. for Filter. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section.

The mass floor schedules list.In this exercise. the floor area. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. by level. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.rvt. under Views (all). you created mass floor schedules. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . you pick massing faces to create roofs. floor perimeter. click Roof by Face. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise.

click Create Roof. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. click Create Roof. 5 On the Options Bar. select Basic Roof : Generic . This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. Your model should now look as shown.400mm. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 .4 In the Type Selector. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family.

select Sloped Glazing. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected.8 Using the method you just learned. click Create Roof. 12 On the Options Bar. and click OK. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. in the Type Selector. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. and Walls. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. Curtain Systems. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. 13 Using the same method. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. select Curtain Panels. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. In this exercise.

2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 5 Press CTRL. 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Select Multiple is selected.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. click Curtain System by Face. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 3 In the Type Selector. click Create System. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. under Views (all).rvt. double-click {3D}. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 .

7 Using the same method. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing . 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. select the blended form on the in-place mass.

click Create System. 11 Using the same method. create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.9 On the Options Bar. Creating Curtain Systems | 643 .

and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing .12 Click Modify to exit the command. you change the size of an existing mass family. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces.rvt. In this exercise.

Floors. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . under Views (all). Curtain Systems. 6 On the Design Bar. clear Curtain Panels. and click OK. and then click OK. 7 On the Options Bar. Roofs. and click (Element Properties). 2 On the View menu. enter 30000. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. and Walls. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown.1 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. for Width. under Floor Plans. Next. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Site. 3 On the Model Categories tab. click Modify. clear Exclude Design Options. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. 4 Select the box mass family as shown.

double-click Level 1. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. 12 On the View Control Bar. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. In the next steps. 11 In the Project Browser. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Views (all). under Floor Plans. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family.10 Open the 3D view to see the result.

click (Default 3D View). click OK. 17 Select the roof as shown. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . you want to select the smaller one. 16 On the View toolbar. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. Also.TIP To select the curtain wall. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. click Remake. 14 On the Options Bar.

and click Remake.18 On the Options Bar. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing . 19 Select the arc dome curtain system. click Remake.

under Schedules/Quantities. In this exercise. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise.20 In the Project Browser.rvt. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. 1 Open the 3D view. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . you changed the size of an existing mass family. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family.

5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 3 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click All to select all categories. under 3D Views. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing.The 3D view now shows only the building shell.Massing only. 6 On the Model Categories tab. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 4 Rename the view 3D . 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . right-click {3D}. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 9 Select Mass.

you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. If desired. such as columns and an extruded roof.In this exercise. You might create the model shown. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 . This concludes the massing tutorial. to the building shell.

652 .

Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. For example. 653 . and Nesting Groups In this lesson. In another exercise. or with those working on a different project. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. hotel rooms. In this tutorial. place. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. The new group is considered nested within the host group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. You mirror one instance of the group. Modifying. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. By grouping objects. In this exercise. you add the new model group to a previously created group. the host group is also updated automatically. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You can also nest groups within other groups. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. Creating. and modify repetitive units. you also simplify the modification process. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. When you make changes to a nested group. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. all instances in the building model are updated. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. After you create a model group. and typical office layouts. you not only simplify their placement. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects.

rvt. and double-click First Floor. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. enter ZR.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. 2 Click in the drawing area. click Training Files.

click (Group).3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . and click OK. 4 On the Edit toolbar. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. enter Typical Kitchen.

656 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. select the center control for the group origin. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area.

12 On the Design Bar.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. expand Model. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. under Groups. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. and click Create Instance. right-click Typical Kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . click Modify.

The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 15 On the Options Bar. clear Copy.14 On the Edit toolbar. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. click (Mirror).

Creating and Placing a Group | 659 . 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. click (Rotate). and on the Edit toolbar.

and one rotated. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . as shown. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. click Modify. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. one mirrored. 20 On the Design Bar.

press TAB to highlight the wall. When you finish editing. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt.rvt. and click Save. Modifying a Group | 661 . Modifying a Group In this exercise.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. and click to select it. click Save As. you make changes to an instance of a group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.

press TAB. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.).). 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. and click to select the wall.). 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. 7 Click (Group Member. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. select the element. and click member to group instance. NOTE To display an excluded element.). 4 Move the cursor over the door. press TAB. click Modify. and click to select the door.3 Click (Group Member. 8 On the Design Bar. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance.

16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. click Door. select Basic Wall : Generic . 12 On the Design Bar. clear Tag on Placement. click Modify. 10 In the Type Selector. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. move the cursor to the left. Modifying a Group | 663 . select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. 14 In the Type Selector. 13 On the Design Bar. click Wall.127mm. 15 On the Options Bar.

The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. click Modify. 23 In the drawing area. move the cursor up. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Edit Group. In edit group mode. 21 On the Options Bar. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. All other elements in the model are grayed out.17 On the Design Bar. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner.

click Finish.25 On the Design Bar. click 28 For Base Offset. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. click Modify. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. created in an earlier lesson. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 1000. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. you add the Typical Kitchen group. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. (Element Properties). and on the Options Bar. and click OK. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Unconnected Height. under Constraints. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Nesting Groups In this exercise. which acts as the host. 26 Select the opening. enter 2134. Nesting Groups | 665 . 29 On the group editor toolbar.

in the Project Browser. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. click Edit Group.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click (Add to Group).rvt. under Floor Plans. 5 In the drawing area. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. select the Typical Kitchen group. 4 On the group editor toolbar. double-click First Floor.

Nesting Groups | 667 . Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group.6 Press TAB. select the wall between the folding doors. and each of the bifold doors. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. click Finish. 7 On the group editor toolbar. double-click Second Floor. under Floor Plans.

Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser.10 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. and filled regions. In the next exercise. such as text. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. such as door and window tags. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. double-click First Floor. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. you add door tags to a group. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan.

5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . click Filled Region. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. and select a point below the left elevator. click Finish Sketch. 4 On the Options Bar. click to draw a rectangular region. 7 On the Design Bar.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. and on the Design Bar. click to add an arc leader. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 16 In the drawing area. 14 On the Edit toolbar. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 9 On the Options Bar. and select the text note and the filled region. click Modify.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Text. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. and click OK. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 12 Enter Tile. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. as shown. click (Group). select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group.

right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. and click Create Instance. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. expand Detail. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . Because the detail group contains variables. 22 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click Second Floor. 21 In the drawing area. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. under Groups.18 On the Design Bar. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 20 In the Project Browser.

4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. as shown. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. under Floor Plans. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. clear Leader. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. double-click First Floor. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area.manner that a drawing component can be added. 3 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Design Bar.rvt. click Modify. click Tag ➤ By Category.

expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. click (Group). 11 In the Project Browser. select Door Tags. 9 On the Edit toolbar. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. for Attached Detail Group Name. and click OK. double-click Second Floor. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 8 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. click (Filter Selection). under Floor Plans.7 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog.

Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. click Place Detail. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. 16 On the Design Bar. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. 14 On the Options Bar. and click OK. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. therefore. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. When you load the group from the library into a new project.

3 For File name. click OK. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog.rvt. 12 On the Design Bar. verify that Project is selected. In this case.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 5 In the New Project dialog. for Create new. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. click Modify. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . A warning dialog displays. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). verify that Same as group name is selected. expand Groups. and click OK. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. accept the default template file. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. and click Create Instance. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. and expand Model. browse to the Desktop. and click Save Group. and click Open. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Desktop. under Groups\Model. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. and click Save. select 2 Bedroom Unit.

verify that Attached Details is selected only. click Modify. click Training Files. click Use Existing. click Link. and on the Options Bar. 23 In the confirmation dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. 17 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click OK. click Bind. expand Revit Links. click Remove Link. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area.rvt. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. and the link is removed. 24 In the message dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group.rvt file is added as a link to the project. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. When a group is converted to a link. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the linked Revit model. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. and click OK. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project.

and walkways. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. 677 . You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. convert the data to a table. islands. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule.Site 19 In this tutorial. You add property lines manually. Using Site Tools In this lesson. In the final exercises. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. you add a building pad to the site. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. and then modify the data.

678 | Chapter 19 Site . The scale of this view is 1 : 100. you create a toposurface using two different methods. Using the first method. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. In the second part of this exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. click Point. click Toposurface. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. right-click in the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. and click Site. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. and double-click Site. This project file was created using the default metric template. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. and open Metric\m_First_Project.

6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. Use the following illustration as a reference.

680 | Chapter 19 Site . 15000mm. click Finish Surface. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. enter 1500mm. click Site Settings. under Increment. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. 12 On the Settings menu. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. under Additional Contours.8 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar. Use the following illustration as a reference. and 18000mm absolute elevations. 12000mm.

modify the level names and elevations. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 18 In the Project Browser. click Modify. on the Standard toolbar. click to view it at various angles. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . Before importing the contour data. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click the elevation value. (SteeringWheels). click to delete it. and double-click South. and press ENTER.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. under Views (all). 15 On the View Control Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. 14 On the View toolbar. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. 16 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). enter 1000mm.

25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 30 On the Edit menu. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. rename the level Basement. under Views (all). 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 24 In the Project Browser. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. select Specify. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. click Modify. select Preserve. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. and click OK. and press ENTER. For Colors.21 Click the Level 2 text. under Floor Plans. rename the level Base Site Elevation. 28 On the Design Bar. 23 Click the Level 1 text. it is considered an import symbol. Click Open. double-click Site. Until it is exploded. For Layers. click Pin Position. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . and press ENTER. click Training Files. click Yes. 29 Select the imported topography. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. Verify that Current view only is not selected.

34 Under Visibility. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points.31 On the Design Bar. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. when the edges highlight. and click OK. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. select it. clear C_INDX. click the Annotation Categories tab. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. clear Elevations. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Visibility/Graphics. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . 36 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. When you select the import symbol. and then click OK. 32 On the View menu. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. click Toposurface.

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. 42 On the View toolbar. 40 On the View toolbar. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . this project file is required in its current state. Adding Property Lines on page 684. click (Default 3D View). you add property lines using two methods.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. 39 On the Design Bar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Using the first method.rvt. and click Save. click (SteeringWheels). name the project Site-in progress. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. click Finish Surface. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. Using the second method.

click Lines. Adding Property Lines | 685 . Click Modify.rvt. On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. If you have not completed the previous exercise. select Create property lines by sketching. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. click Lines. under Floor Plans. click Property Line. and click OK. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. Select and delete the right vertical line. do so before continuing. double-click Site. 4 On the Design Bar. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Site-in progress.

NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. to delete them. click 12 On the Design Bar. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. and click OK. select the lines. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. select Edit Table. 9 In the warning dialog. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. A warning dialog is displayed. click OK. when they highlight. click OK.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. add an arc line on the right. click Finish Sketch. click Property Line. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . on the Standard toolbar. 6 On the Design Bar.

15 Starting in Row #1.14 In the Property Lines dialog. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. Adding Property Lines | 687 . Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. click to place the property lines. If the gap is not closed. This means there is no gap in the property lines. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. 16 Click OK. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. 19 In the Tags dialog. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line.

notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. 27 On the Options Bar. In the final step. 22 In the Tags dialog. 25 Under Visibility. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. In this exercise. click to place it. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. click Tag ➤ By Category. The tags display more prominently in this view. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. this project file is required in its current state. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. 23 On the View menu. you loaded and tagged the property line segments.rfa. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 30 On the View Control Bar. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. right-click in the Design Bar. In the next exercise. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines.20 Click Load. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. and click Drafting. click the Imported Categories tab. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. you created two sets of property lines. Before adding property line segment tags.dwg and click OK. click Training Files. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. clear Leader.

specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. Site-in progress. click Site Settings. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. select Topography. 7 Click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Under Range Type. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. select a shade of Brown. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. select Single Value. select Working Contour.rvt. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. Under Subcategory. In the Object Styles dialog. enter the name Working Contour. Under Line Color. Under Line Pattern. select Dash dot.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. 10 Under Additional Contours. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click Object Styles. 2 On the Settings menu. click New. enter 1000.0mm. under Contour Line Display. and click OK. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. for Subcategory.

Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. you create subregions in order to define roads. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. such as material. The object style subcategory. you created a new object style subcategory for topography.11 Click OK. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. you create topographic subregions to define roads. and islands. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. In the next exercise. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. and islands. parking areas. parking areas. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. The next exercise requires a new training file. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . Working Contour. In this exercise.

click Lines. 2 On the Design Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. click Training Files.rvt. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Although the exact dimensions are not important. and open Metric\m_Site. try to replicate the location and proportion. click Subregion. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 .

6 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. enter Parking for Name. 692 | Chapter 19 Site .Tarmacadam for Name. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. select Site . 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click OK. and click to open the Materials dialog. When you finish the sketch in a later step. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. click the value for Material. under Identity Data. 8 On the Design Bar. click Properties. click Finish Sketch.NOTE In the Metric training file. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.

This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. double-click Site. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region.9 On the View Control Bar. expand Schedules/Quantities. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . under Floor Plans. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. click Edit Boundary. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site .Tarmacadam. As you create new subregions. and double-click Topography Schedule. 12 On the View Control Bar. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. they display within this schedule. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar.

under Floor Plans. 17 On the View Control Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. In this training project. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. 22 On the Design Bar. 20 On the View Control Bar. double-click Topography Schedule. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. Notice that the project area has increased. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . 18 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Within each subregion. click Lines. double-click Site. click Finish Sketch. 16 On the Design Bar. click Subregion. Delete overlapping lines. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area.

27 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 30 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities.Grass for Name. 28 On the Design Bar. Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 . 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. and click OK. select Site . under Materials and Finishes.23 In the upper-right parking area. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. 26 In the Materials dialog.Grass for Name. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. and click to open the Materials dialog. 24 On the Design Bar. enter Island . double-click Topography Schedule. click Properties. click the value for Material. and click OK. 29 On the View Control Bar.

and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . Name the subregion Walkway. double-click Site.Grass. under Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the schedule has been updated. 34 On the Design Bar.31 In the Project Browser. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . under Floor Plans. 35 On the Design Bar. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. and apply the material Site . click Subregion. under Floor Plans. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. Name each region Island Grass. double-click Site. You must sketch each region separately. double-click Topography Schedule.walkway. click Lines. 32 In the Project Browser. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser.

double-click Topography Schedule. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. under Schedules/Quantities. there is still only one toposurface. click Finish Sketch. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. 38 In the Project Browser. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . 37 On the Design Bar.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. Notice that the schedule has been updated. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project.

Site tutorial-in progress. When you use the grading tool. 2 Select the toposurface. name the project Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. under Floor Plans. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area.rvt. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. double-click Site. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. this project file is required in its current state. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . and click Save. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser.

RELATED For more information regarding phasing. 6 On the Design Bar. see the tutorial. click (Element Properties). click Modify. Using Phasing on page 761. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.3 On the Options Bar. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. 8 Select the topographic surface. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. and click Select and Edit. select Copy Internal Points. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. click Graded Region. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. select Existing for Phase Created. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. 5 On the Design Bar. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . under Phasing. A warning dialog is displayed. and click OK.

700 | Chapter 19 Site . 10 Press DELETE.Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and new. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. demolished. 11 On the View Control Bar.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. Grading the Toposurface | 701 .

specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. 15 On the Options Bar. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar. click (Default 3D View). 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration.13 Press DELETE. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. 702 | Chapter 19 Site . click Finish Surface. click Point. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 18 On the View toolbar. 17 On the Design Bar. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat.

and click OK. you can delete it. specify Existing for Phase. under Phasing. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. (SteeringWheels). NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click to view it at various angles. Only the graded topography displays. 23 Select the toposurface. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . only the original toposurface displays. under Phasing. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. and delete it.20 On the View toolbar. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. and click OK. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a building pad. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. specify New Construction for Phase. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. When you add a building pad. Therefore. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. click View Properties. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. 24 On the View menu. click View Properties. this project file is required in its current state. 27 Proceed to the next exercise.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . click Finish Sketch. click Pad. double-click Site. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. under Floor Plans. NOTE By default. 4 On the Design Bar. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Design Bar. If you have an existing building model. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. the Pick Walls command is active. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the View Control Bar. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. click Lines.

this project file is required in its current state. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. Notice the new building pad. 9 On the View toolbar. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 7 On the View Control Bar. click (SteeringWheels). NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. Adding Site Components on page 706. click (Default 3D View). 8 On the View toolbar.

90 deg. 706 | Chapter 19 Site . and select the parking space. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.rvt. double-click Site. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area.Adding Site Components In this exercise. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. click Parking Component. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. click Modify. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. Site tutorial-in progress. under Floor Plans.

7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. Adding Site Components | 707 . 8 On the View toolbar. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space.NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. click (Default 3D View). TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task.

under Floor Plans. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. choose any tree type. click Site Component. 12 In the Type Selector. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.9 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. click (SteeringWheels). Notice the new parking spaces. double-click Site.

click (Default 3D View). In the following illustration. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. click (SteeringWheels). Adding Site Components | 709 . 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 14 On the View toolbar. 15 On the View toolbar. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered.

5 On the View menu. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and click Apply. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. double-click Site.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. under Floor Plans. Site tutorial-in progress. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. this project file is required in its current state. click Apply. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . 17 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Hidden Line. click Tag All Not Tagged.

9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. Click up and to the left. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. outside of the site. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. to position the shoulder of the leader. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. as shown: 10 Using the same method. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. Click again to the left to position the leader. In the following exercise. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. 8 On the Options Bar. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 .

12 Press and hold CTRL. 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. 712 | Chapter 19 Site .■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. 11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and select the 3 spot dimensions.

14 On the Design Bar. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713.■ Clear Leader. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. you create a parking schedule. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. this project file is required in its current state. click Modify.

under Space. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. and click Add. 11 On the Window menu. 10 In the Project Browser. number the first three spaces consecutively. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. click Close Hidden Windows. 7 Under Fields. 9 On the Window menu. and under Heading. select Parking for Category. double-click Site. and click OK. under Floor Plans. The parking schedule is displayed. 4 Under Available fields. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. under Views (all). select Mark. This closes all the views except the parking schedule.rvt. If necessary. click Tile. select Type. enter Size. enter Space. 5 Under Available fields. and click OK. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Site tutorial-in progress.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . 12 In the Site plan. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 8 Under Fields. select Type. select Mark. and under Heading. 6 Click the Formatting tab. 13 In the Parking Schedule. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and click Add. click the Fields tab. click Schedule/Quantities.

This allows you to know which space you are numbering. finish numbering the remaining spaces.Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 . Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. 14 In the Parking Schedule. under Space. the selected space highlights in the Site plan.

716 .

Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 . such as walls. and so on. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Elements specific to a view. The first time you activate worksets within a project. however. Working in a shared project In a shared project. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. you specify an active workset. and click Editable. they cannot make changes to it. go to the Worksets dialog. floors. you can select which worksets are open or closed. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. All other team members can view this workset. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. To make a workset editable. In this tutorial. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. doors. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. Using Worksharing. you must first enable Worksharing. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. such as annotations and dimensions. A workset is a collection of building elements. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. select the desired workset. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. After the project is shared. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. When you are working on a shared project. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. stairs. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. called Worksharing. You can enable Worksharing for any project. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. use Element Borrowing. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element.

Instead. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. After learning the fundamentals. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. In the lessons and exercises that follow. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . not including the Project Standards. Shared Levels and Grids. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. In the next exercise. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. for a typical project. In a multi-story structure. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. and View worksets. In most projects.dialog. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. You should have at least one workset for each person. such as a tenant interior. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. Experience has shown that. When setting up Worksharing. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios.

Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. with each assigned a specific functional task. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. designers work in teams. As new members create worksets for their own use. if a workset named Interior was created. For example. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view.Team member roles Typically. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Regardless of the default setting. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. On this tab. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. each team member has control over a portion of the design. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. When you create a new workset. When creating the new worksets. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles.

you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. As you work. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. However. your changes are saved. This makes them available to other team members. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. This is called “Selective Open. On the Options Bar. within the local file. you can select which workset is active. When you save locally (to your local file). This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. Therefore. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. you make that workset editable by you. When you save to the central file. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. When you save to the central file. After saving to the central file. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. the file is saved as the central file. proceeds as usual. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects .” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Generally. however.Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. you should then save to your local file. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. your changes propagate to the entire team. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. When finished or at regular intervals.

you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. using VPN. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. In this conceptual exercise. and then save the local file. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. When working remotely. In this instance. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. save to the central file. In the next exercise. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. you work no differently then you would in the office. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. Alternatively. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. To do this. In this situation. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. and make that workset editable. you should check out the Materials workset.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. for instance. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. make any required worksets editable. if you know who checked out the required workset. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. reload the latest changes from the central file.

2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. When you enable worksharing. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. and notice all are editable by you. under Show. The Worksets dialog displays. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. click Worksets. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. 3 In the Worksets dialog. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Worksets. Your username displays as the present owner. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. click Training Files. you enable Worksharing within an existing project.rvt.

Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. 13 In the Rename dialog. ■ 5 Under Show. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. Only User-Created worksets should display. For example. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. 14 In the Worksets dialog. 12 Click Rename. imagine four users including yourself. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. When you initially activate Worksharing. however. In this case. click . a small number of team members are working on the building model. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. under Identity Data. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. click New. clear Families. 16 In the drawing area. clear Visible by default in all views. currently named Workset1. 17 On the Options Bar. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. select Workset1. another is assigned the interior layout. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. click OK. 9 Click New. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. and click OK. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. it is better to make them visible by default. Therefore. For training purposes. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. Because the interior walls appear in many views. and Views. Project Standards. 11 In the Worksets dialog. In this simple training project. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset.■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. In this training file. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. 8 Click OK. type the name Exterior Shell. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". you can rename the default workset. expand Floor Plans. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. You do.

22 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. click . 21 On the Options Bar. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. select Interior Layout for Workset. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. click the Worksets tab. 23 Select all of the interior elements. 24 On the Options Bar. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. including the interior doors. and walls. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements.19 Click OK. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. under Identity Data. 20 Select one of the interior walls. select Interior Layout for Workset. stairs. and click OK. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 29 Click OK. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. click . and click OK. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. 26 On the View menu.

This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. click the Worksets tab. 35 On the Options Bar. Now that you have created the central file. 30 On the View menu. 43 Click OK. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. select Interior Layout for Workset. 33 In the Project Browser. click Worksets. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. under Identity Data. and click OK. you enabled Worksharing on a project. under Floor Plans. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. 39 Click Save. 44 On the File menu. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. click Save As. In this exercise. click Visibility/Graphics. click Non Editable. 42 On the right side of the dialog. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. 38 In the Save As dialog. click Close. double-click Level 2. select all of the interior elements of the building model. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. 34 In the drawing area. make sure you remember the location of this central file. and click OK. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. 32 Select Interior Layout. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. click . 36 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. If any interior elements remain. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. under Views (all). 41 In the Worksets dialog.

In addition. and select Yes for Editable. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. In this case. You have created a local file which is for your use only. select Interior Layout for Name. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. 11 In the Worksets dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. click Options. 15 In the Project Browser. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and click OK. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. click Worksets. and click OK. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. Before working on the model. you create your local file. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). check out worksets. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. 7 In the Save As dialog. 2 In the Open dialog. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. and double-click Level 1. Next. select all the User-Created worksets. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. If you have not yet completed the exercise. 4 Click Open. and select Specify. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. please do so before continuing. and click Save. 12 Click OK. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 13 On the Window menu. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. select the central file. click Save As. make modifications to the building model. 6 On the File menu. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. select Interior Layout. click Open. you should activate the Worksets toolbar.

a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. If this is selected. 18 On the Options Bar. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. however. click Worksets. In the Worksets dialog. notice the Editable Only option. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. In this case. Verify that it is cleared. 23 On the File menu. Because this element is not owned by another user. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. 21 On the Options Bar.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. 22 Click OK. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. If it was owned by another user. click Modify. under Identity Data. click . 20 Under Constraints. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. 24 Click OK. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. and click OK. click . select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. you can still edit this wall. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. On the Options Bar.

728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects .126mm Partition (2-hr). 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 29 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. The precise location is not important. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. click Wall. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. 31 On the Design Bar. 26 Delete the door. select Basic Wall: Interior .Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 34 In the Type Selector. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. click Door.

and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. Borrowed Elements is selected. In this particular case. If you have not yet completed these exercises. which matches the information in the Status Bar. please do so before continuing. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. You modified the building model. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . Throughout the process. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. it is recommended. By default. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. checked out worksets. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. displays the workset as well as the element type. you should perform regular saves. leave this file open in its current state. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. you should relinquish all worksets. Whenever you save.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. make elements editable. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. each user must check out worksets. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. you created your local file. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. In addition. In this exercise. and save locally immediately afterward. two users access the central file through a network connection. and reload the latest changes. At the end of a work session. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. click Save to Central. For training purposes. save to central. a tooltip. When working in your local file. add two door openings into the rooms you created.

Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. User 2: Create a local file. For training purposes. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 4 Click the General Tab and. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. one user has already created a local file. and click OK. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and click Save. and select Specify. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. and select Yes for Editable. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). click Worksets. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. You now have a local copy of the project. under Username. 7 In the Open dialog. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. and click OK. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. instructions are staggered. click Options. return to the Settings dialog. click Open. In the following section of this exercise. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. skip the following section. select all the User-Created worksets. 9 Click Open. In addition. 15 On the File menu. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 3 On the Settings menu. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. select the central file. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. click Save As.rvt. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and click OK. and reset the Username to your computer login name. consider that person to be User 1.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. click Options. This is a system setting. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. specifically sequenced. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. This file is for your use only. enter User 2. and proceed to Creating a local copy. 12 In the Save As dialog. 11 On the File menu. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. Regardless of which central file you choose to use.

expand Floor Plans. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. click Save to Central. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. 23 Click OK. 17 Click OK. and double-click Level 1. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . click Worksets. If you only have one workset checked out. If it is not open. select the lower exterior wall. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. 19 On the File menu. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall.You are now the owner of that workset. it becomes the active workset. 24 In the Project Browser. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2.” 29 Click OK. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. expand Floor Plans. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. and select Yes for Editable. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. open it now. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. modify the building model. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. expand Views (all). Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. and double-click Level 1. 27 On the File menu. expand Views (all). 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. User 1: Check out worksets. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration.

you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. Before adding any furniture. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. User 1: Reload latest worksets. click Worksets. When you save to central.” 39 Click OK. 37 On the File menu. 42 Select Furniture Layout.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. right-click Copy of Level 1. 44 In the Project Browser. click Reload Latest. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. 43 In the Project Browser. 45 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.” 35 Click OK. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. However. 41 On the File menu. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. The changes User 2 made are apparent. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. click Save to Central. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . right-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 33 On the File menu. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. click Save to Central. Click Yes. and click Rename. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. and click OK. select Yes for Editable. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. under Floor Plans. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. 46 In the Project Browser. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. you should create a furniture plan view. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. and click OK. under Views (all).

200mm. click Modify. Therefore. such as Wall Types. the Visible by default option was not selected. 60 In the Rename dialog. click the Worksets tab. choose any desk.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Reload Latest. and click inside any room. under Show. 61 Click OK 2 times. NOTE System families. click Save to Central. and click OK. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. 62 On the File menu. 66 On the File menu. 48 In the Type Selector. rather than Families. 63 In the Worksets dialog. 65 Click OK. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. enter Exterior Wall . 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types.” 55 Click OK. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. click Component. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 50 On the View menu. and click OK. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. click Rename. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. select Project Standards. click Save to Central. are placed under Project Standards. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 49 On the Design Bar. 53 On the File menu. and click Element Properties. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. click Edit/New. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. click Worksets.

71 In the Save to Central dialog. leave this file open in its current state. In subsequent steps. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. Each user must have network access to the central file. leave this file open in its current state. This exercise requires two users and. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. In the final exercise of this tutorial. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages.rvt. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. click Save As. At the appropriate point in this exercise. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. and save 69 On the File menu. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. Checking out worksets. User 1: Reload latest. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. Each user checked out worksets. 70 On the File menu. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. click Training Files. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. and published their changes back to the central file. throughout this training. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . finished the previous workset exercises. click Options. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. and still have your local files open. As each of you work. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. modified the building model. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. There are specific instructions for each user. select Save to Central. select Reload Latest. 3 In the Save As dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you need to set up your central and local files. select the following. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). you save the training file as a central file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. and these problems are rectified.

and click OK. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 6 On the File menu. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 17 On the File menu.4 In the File Save Options dialog. 18 In the Save As dialog. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 13 In the Open dialog. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. select the central file. This is the local file for User 1. click Options. 12 On the File menu. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . On the Settings menu. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 15 Click Open. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. click Options. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. The central file should still be open. and select Specify. click Open. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. click Options. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Set the Username to User 2. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. and click OK. and reset the Username to your computer login name. click Save As. In addition. Next. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. This is a system setting. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. click Save As. and click OK. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. select Make this a Central File after save. 5 Click Save. return to the Settings dialog. and click Save. and click Save. 8 In the Save As dialog. You have created a local file which is for your use only. and click OK.

29 On the Options Bar. 27 Under Active Workset. You are now the owner of that workset. 26 In the Worksets dialog. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. and select Yes for Editable. 30 On the left exterior wall. and click Open. select the Interior Layout workset.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. and select Yes for Editable. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. under Floor Plans. 24 Under Active Workset. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. and then click OK. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. At this point. click Worksets. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. Afterwards. and then click OK. You are now the owner of that workset. verify that Editable Only is cleared. select Interior Layout. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. select Exterior Shell. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. select the second window from the top. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. and click Editing Requests. After you submit the request. select them. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Worksets dialog. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. double-click Level 1. click the File menu. if any User-Created worksets are not open. click Worksets.

User 1 and 2: Save to Central. 38 Click OK. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. In this multi-user exercise. select Save to Central. In this case. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. 36 Click Close. you requested permission to edit the element. to Local. and notice the window is in the new location. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. click Check Now. A message informs you that your request has been granted. and click OK. select the following.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. and close 39 On the File menu. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. click Close. 35 Click Grant. select the request submitted by User 2. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . and the other user granted it.

738 .

At any time in the design process. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. In this tutorial. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). you can have multiple sets of design options. After you and the client agree on the final design.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. In this particular case. and each option set can have multiple schemes. For example. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. Using design options. In addition. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. The client has asked you to create various options. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. 739 . you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model.

and click Close. under Option Set. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. each with multiple design options. 2 In the Design Options dialog. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. make your final design decision. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). you can edit it. After you create a design option. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . the only available command is to create a new option set. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. and delete the unwanted options from the project. In the final exercise of this lesson. you set up multiple design option sets. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. With the second option. you design each of the structural options. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. TIP In this exercise. each is constructed for interchangeability. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. click Edit Selected. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to manage and organize the design options.In the first exercise in this lesson. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. In the second exercise. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. therefore. click New. the roof and structure systems must work together. 3 Select Option 1 (primary).

or add a dimension string between the columns. 5 On the View menu. and the third column centered between the two. 9 On the Design Bar. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. 11 On the Edit toolbar. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. add three columns. In the following illustration.4 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. expand Views (all). 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. TIP To center the middle column. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. click 12 On the Options Bar. In this case. select: ■ ■ ■ . click Column. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). By selecting Multiple. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. click Modify. 7 In the Type Selector. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter.

17 Zoom out and. click .TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. 18 On the View toolbar. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. using the same technique. A copy of the three selected columns is added. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . they are difficult to see in this view. Because of the size of the columns. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. When you are finished. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch.

Notice the 12 columns that you added. select Round Bar : 50mm. double-click TOP OF CORE. Zoom in on the upper right column. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. click Modify. 21 In the Type Selector. and click at its center to set the beam start point. under Floor Plans. Adding a beam is a two-click process. In it. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. click Beam. 19 In the Project Browser. Use the following illustration as a guide. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. Next. 23 On the Design Bar. The first click specifies the beam start point. you add the beams that span the columns. The second click specifies the end of the beam.

click . and click the center point. 30 On the View toolbar. 28 Zoom out. 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .25 On the Edit toolbar. click 26 On the Options Bar. select: ■ ■ ■ . and select the center of the column to add a copy. move down to the next set of columns. zoom into the left column. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns.

under Option. click Rename. 37 Select Option 2 and. 32 In the Design Options dialog. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. select Option 1 (primary). 34 In the Design Options dialog. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . click Rename. click Rename. under Option. and click OK. and click OK. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. 45 Under Roofing. click New. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. click New. enter Roofing for New. not a new option set. under Option Set. enter Structure for New. and click OK. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 46 Under Option. name the option Louvers. under Option Set.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. under Option. click New. click Rename. 41 Under Option Set. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. click Rename. 36 In the Rename dialog. 38 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. enter Brackets for New. enter Beam for New. under Option. There should now be two roofing design options. 40 In the Rename dialog. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. 33 Click Finish Editing. and click OK. 43 In the Rename dialog.

you create the second design option. 52 Click Close. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. Under Now Editing. and click OK. click Rename. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. double-click ROOF TERRACE. 53 In the Project Browser. This allows you to more easily manage the project. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 51 Under Edit. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed.47 Under Roofing. under Structure. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. 48 Under Option. select Option 2. select Beam. under Floor Plans. name the option Sunscreen. 50 In the Design Options dialog. When finished. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. select Edit Selected. it will resemble the following illustration.

The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. select M_Roof Beam. click Align. 58 On the Tools menu.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The second click represents the plane that is moved. click Component. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . Using the Align tool requires two clicks. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. Refer to the following illustration. 56 In the Type Selector.

The second click represents the move end point. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . on the Edit toolbar. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam.60 After aligning the beam. 61 On the Design Bar. 62 Select the beam and. The first click sets the move start point. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. Click to indicate the end point of the move. click Modify.

You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. Notice that even before you close the dialog.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. 68 In the Design Options dialog. m_Urban_House-in progress. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. 69 Click Close. and click Save. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. click . 67 On the Tools menu. name the file. click Design Options ➤ Design Options.rvt. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. 70 On the File menu. click Save As. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. 66 On the View toolbar. which is visible by default. you need this file in its current state. click Finish Editing. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial.

place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options.rvt. click Edit Selected. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. you set up multiple design option sets.In this exercise. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. click Component. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. Under Now Editing. select Louvers (primary). and double-click TOP OF CORE. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. 3 In the Design Options dialog. do so now. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. In the next exercise. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. 10 Referring to the following illustration. 4 Under Edit. Sunscreen. you design each of the roofing options. a Louver system. 5 Click Close. If you need to add dimensions. expand Floor Plans. 6 In the Project Browser. open it now. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. the other for beams. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. expand Views (all). is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. The first option. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. 2 On the Tools menu. delete them after the rafter is in place. 8 In the Type Selector. With the second option. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. under Roofing. each with multiple design options to pick from. The second roofing system. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system.

13 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. 15 On the Edit menu. click Array. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. click Modify. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. Enter 5 for Number. click . 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. 16 On the Options Bar. Select Constrain. Select 2nd for Move To.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. enter 11750 mm for Length. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system.

18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. and press ENTER. when the listening dimension displays. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . enter 990.

and click Array. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click . Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . Enter 34 for Number. 25 With the louver still selected. and click OK. 22 On the Design Bar. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. click Component. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. 27 For the array starting point. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. enter 5475 mm for Length. and select the louver you just placed. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. click the Edit menu. under Other. 23 On the Options Bar.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 20 In the Type Selector. Select Constrain. Select 2nd for Move To. click Modify. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 26 On the Options Bar.

click . 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and. when the listening dimension displays. 29 On the View toolbar. enter 300. and press Enter. Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart.28 Move the cursor vertically downward.

select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 40 On the Options Bar. In this case. click Edit Selected. click Finish Editing. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. 37 In the Work Plane dialog.The louver roof system is complete. Therefore. expand Elevations. click Lines. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. and then click Close. select Sunscreen. 31 In the Design Options dialog. 33 Under Editing. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. 34 In the Project Browser. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . Click OK. click . Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. and click OK. 30 On the Tools menu. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. under Edit. under Roofing. 39 On the Design Bar. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. and double-click West.

43 On the Design Bar. click Trim/Extend. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. click Properties. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. You will fix this in a later step. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. Under Constraints. The first two points define the ends of the line. 41 Select the top of the left column. 45 Click OK. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. 46 On the Tools menu. Select the right arc. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. Under Constraints. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. click . and the third point defines the arc. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . The arcs should connect. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. click Finish Sketch. then the center arc. 49 On the View toolbar. 48 On the Design Bar. the top of the next column on the right. then you can modify it through the dimension.

Managing Design Options | 757 . Sunscreen. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. click Finish Editing. you need this file in its current state. 2 In the Project Browser. After exploring the combinations. secondary. enter Primary Option. expand 3D Views. you designed each of the roofing options. 52 On the File menu. and click OK. tertiary. make it part of the building model. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. you select a design. under Edit. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. and then click Close. under Views (all). 51 In the Design Options dialog. Managing Design Options In this exercise. 4 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. 50 On the Tools menu. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options.The louver roof system is complete. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. under 3D Views. under Views (all). and delete the discarded design options. and click Rename. The first option. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. click Save. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. do so now. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. The second roofing system. and last options. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. right-click {3D}. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. a Louver system.

double-click Secondary Option. under Views (all). click the Design Options tab. under 3D Views. click the Design Options tab. click Visibility/Graphics. 10 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 9 Click OK. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 7 On the View menu. under 3D Views. and click OK. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .5 Right-click each of the copies. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Primary Option. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. 11 On the View menu.

and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. click Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). 19 On the View menu. under Views (all). double-click Tertiary Option. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. 15 On the View menu.14 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In this case. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. under 3D Views. 18 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In your design options. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. At this point. click the Design Options tab. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. click the Design Options tab. Managing Design Options | 759 . specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. under 3D Views. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. double-click Last Option. and click OK. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary.

27 In the alert dialog. After exploring the combinations. you selected a design. click Yes. 29 Select Roofing. Because the client has selected the design option. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. 30 Under Option Set. 35 On the File menu. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. This was the client choice for structural. 31 In the alert dialog. 24 Under Option. under Structure. click Delete to remove the views that used options. double-click Primary Option. and deleted the discarded design options. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. click Delete. since you no longer need them. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. made it part of the building model. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. click Close. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . select Make Primary. 33 In the Design Options dialog. An alert is displayed. The set is deleted. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. select Beam. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. but should be accepted as part of the building model. the beam option becomes part of the model. click Yes. 23 In the Design Options dialog. click Save. click Accept Primary.22 On the Tools menu. 25 Select Structure. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. In this exercise. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. the current primaries are no longer options. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. 26 Under Option Set.

In the second exercise. demolish existing construction. In the lesson and exercises that follow. complete with schedules. then add new walls and doors in a different location. 761 . Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. demolish existing walls and doors. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. You create new phases. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views.Project Phasing 22 In any project. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. In the second exercise. You create new phases. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. For the client. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. and then add new building model elements. This changes room definition and total building model area. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow.

and click OK. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. As you add new elements to the building model. define the units. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. click Modify. are visible in this view. regardless of phase. 7 Click Cancel. under Phasing. During the demolition and renovation process. In the Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. click Project Units.rvt. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . and open Common\c_Phasing. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. 4 Click Cancel. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. go to the Settings menu. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. When you create a new project. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. 6 On the Options Bar. under Phasing. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. click (Element Properties). you do not need to change the project units to metric. This means that all building model elements. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If you wish to do so. expand Floor Plans.

TIP If this were a multi-story building. under Floor Plans. including the door tags.Existing. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. 11 In the Filter dialog. under Phasing. 19 In the Project Browser.Demo. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. After you create the views. right-click Copy of Level 1 . Phasing Your Model | 763 .Existing. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click . draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. click Modify. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. 17 Click No. 16 In the Rename dialog. right-click Level 1 . and click OK. and click OK. select Existing. 18 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. enter Level 1 . and click OK. click (Filter Selection). Because this is a renovation project. right-click Level 1. enter Level 1 . all of the building model elements. and click Rename. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. After you release the mouse button. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. 12 On the Options Bar. clear Door Tags.Existing. under Floor Plans. Because this is a phase-specific view. 20 In the Rename dialog. 14 On the Design Bar. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. and click OK. and click Rename. 10 On the Options Bar. are highlighted in red.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. for Phase Created.

A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. Next. Later in this exercise.Demo. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. and Temporary. enter Composite Plan. and click OK. You may need to zoom in to see this. 27 Click New. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. new construction occurs after existing construction. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. select Overridden. 24 In the Project Browser. for Phase. Existing. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under New.Existing. In this case. 29 For Composite Plan. under Phasing. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. under Floor Plans. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. under Floor Plans. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . click the Phase Filters tab. There are five default phase filters. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. double-click Level 1 . 21 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 . Phase status is time-dependent. select Existing. Because of this time relationship. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Demolished. to which all the building model elements belong. however. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. 26 In the Phasing dialog. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. On a logical time line. 28 Under Filter Name. you modify these settings.

35 Click OK twice. 32 In the Demolished row. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. select the line style. 39 In the Phasing dialog. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display.Demo. or you can use the demolish tool. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. under Floor Plans. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. There are two ways to demolish an element. As you click each wall. its display changes to a red dashed line. Phasing Your Model | 765 . 42 In the Project Browser. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. under Floor Plans. 34 In the Color dialog. select red. select a lighter blue. double-click Level 1 . select Demolished. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. Next. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. select the interior walls one at a time. click (Demolish). Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue.Existing. click OK. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns.31 Under Phase Status. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. you begin demolition. you demolish all elements hosted by it. When you demolish the host. double-click Level 1 . 36 Using the same method. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. under Cut ➤ Lines. click the value for Color. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog.

and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. 49 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. for Phase Filter. for Phase Filter. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. 47 In the Type Selector. click Wall. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". The demolished walls no longer display. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 53 Open Level 1 . 51 Add a door leading into each room.Demo.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click Door. select Show Previous + New. select Basic Wall: Interior . add a long horizontal wall.Existing. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. and click OK. under Phasing. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. 52 Open Level 1 . under Phasing. 45 In the Element Properties dialog.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 50 In the Type Selector.

62 If necessary.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. click (Default 3D View). new is shown in blue.New. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and existing shows as half-tone. because the phase filter is set to Show All. All elements are displayed in this view. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. right-click Level 1 . 61 On the View Control Bar. 57 In the Project Browser. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. which are displayed as red. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. The renovated building model plan is displayed. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). 60 On the View toolbar.Demo.New. regardless of phase. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Phasing Your Model | 767 . 59 Open Level 1 .

All room boundaries are phase-specific. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. and double-click Level 1 . you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. In the next exercise. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. You can also see that the room quantities. In this exercise. and new construction. If you wish to do so. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. you can do so at this time. 63 Close the file. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags.rvt. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase.New. and click OK. demolition. Notice that this view is the original building model. If you wish to save this file. expand Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this view. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. go to the Settings menu. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . click Project Units. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you do not need to change the project units to metric. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. As the renovation process continues. the rooms change in both definition and size. define the units. expand Views (all). and locations change depending on the phase of the project. sizes. therefore. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. 2 Open Level 1 .Demo. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. you can see the new walls added to the building model. 3 Open Level 1 . In this view.Existing.

8 Using the following illustration as a guide. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. click Modify.Demo. click Room Tag. click Room. click Room. click in each room as you move to the right. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . 11 On the Design Bar. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. and maximize the view. 6 Open Level 1 . 5 Click OK. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. yet they have different room numbers. Use the following illustration as a guide.Existing. 10 Open Level 1 . 13 Open Level 1 . 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase.New. In the Phasing dialog. 9 On the Design Bar. notice that there are two phases defined in this project.

you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. expand Schedules/Quantities. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. In addition. click Close Hidden Windows. click Tile.Existing. 17 On the Window menu. 19 On the Window menu. In this exercise.New Construction. The two schedule views tile. 20 Close the file. 16 In the Project Browser. View phase-specific room schedules. 18 Open Room Schedule .15 Using the following illustration as a guide. and double-click Room Schedule . add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. In this case. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule.

Comparison of alternatives on a site. This maximizes efficiency. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. 771 . you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. modify their visibility. You position the building models on the site plan. performance. In these situations. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. In the final lesson. In this tutorial. and manage the links throughout the project. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed.

NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. modify their visibility. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto .Linking Building Models In this lesson. You link two building models to the project. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. and the other is a townhouse. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. You position the building models on the site. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. One building model is a condominium.

you can do so. Otherwise. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. click Save As. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. right-click. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. All three files now reside. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. and save the file there. c_Townhouse. this option will place the link at a predefined location. this system is not exposed to the user. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual .Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. and click Properties. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. click Open. c_Condo_Complex.■ Auto . This option is grayed out.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. with write permission. Manual . Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. ■ ■ Manual . RELATED See the lesson.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. select the three files. in the Model Linking folder that you created. click Close. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. 8 Clear Read-only. 5 On the File menu. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. Select c_Site. and click OK. and open Common\c_Site. however. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. 4 On the File menu.rvt. 2 On the File menu.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. Click Open. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. Auto . click Open.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system.

13 Click Open.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. expand Floor Plans. If you wish to do so. For Positioning. 11 On the File menu. and make your changes. 10 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. expand Views (all). click Project Units. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. you do not need to change the project units to metric. you can go to the Settings menu. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. Notice the blue detail lines. select Auto . click Import/Link ➤ Revit. and double-click Level 1. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .Origin to Origin.

15 On the Edit toolbar.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. The first click specifies the move start point. After you select it. The linked model moves as one object. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. 17 For the move endpoint. The second click specifies the move endpoint. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. Standard move commands work with linked building models. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . click (Move). The Move command requires two clicks.rvt displays in the Type Selector. 16 For the move start point. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex.

776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 21 Click Open. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. click Import/Link ➤ Revit.Origin to Origin. 18 On the View menu. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu.After you specify the location to move to. For Positioning. select Auto . and select c_Townhouse.

and click to specify the end of the rotation. you first specify the rotation start point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise.The townhouse building model displays above the site model. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. To rotate an object. In this case. click (Rotate). click to specify the rotation start point. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. when the vertical line displays. 23 On the Edit toolbar.

27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. click (Move).

30 For the starting point. click (Copy). 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. The Copy command works much like the Move command. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. The first click specifies the start point. and the second click specifies the copy-to point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 .The townhouse is located within its required footprint.

34 On the Options Bar. enter Townhouse A. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. click Rotate. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. 37 On the View toolbar. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. 32 On the Edit menu. and click OK. for Name. click . 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. use the Move command to make any adjustments. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. under Identity data. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Default 3D View).

click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. they were placed too low within the site topography. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. When you originally linked the files. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.38 On the File menu. do so before continuing. In the next exercise. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. click Save. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. If you have not completed the previous exercise. After linking the files. click (SteeringWheels). In this exercise. In this exercise. 2 On the SteeringWheels. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. you need this project file open and in this view. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. click and hold Orbit.

If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. click (Align). 3 In the Project Browser. and click to select the line. you first select the plane you want to align to. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. 7 On the Tools toolbar. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. In the steps that follow. under Views (all). Click the Revit Links tab. expand Elevations. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. To do this. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and then select the plane that you want to align. and click OK. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. and double-click South. In this case.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. When using the Align command. when it highlights. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. and click to select it. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar.rvt.

double-click North. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. This would over-constrain the model. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. 15 On the File menu. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. click 13 On the View toolbar. 12 On the View toolbar. under Elevations. (SteeringWheels). 11 Return to the South elevation view. click (Default 3D View). 14 On the SteeringWheels. click Save. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . click and hold Orbit. 9 In the Project Browser. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.

click the Revit Links tab. In this exercise. click By Host View.rvt. and the halftone settings for each linked project. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 4 Under Visibility. In the next exercise. select <Custom>. As you can see. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. double-click South. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. click OK. under Elevations. click Custom. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. you can independently control the visibility settings. 10 Click OK. If the Basics page is set to Custom. 8 For Annotation Categories. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. expand c_Townhouse. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. 9 Under Visibility. scroll down and clear Levels. click Visibility/Graphics. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. detail level. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. display settings. or Custom. 2 On the View menu. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. you need this project file open and in this view. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. do so before continuing. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. If you have not completed the previous exercise. By linked view. the defaults are set to By host view for all options.rvt. When you link a file. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View.

This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. expand c_Townhouse. click Visibility/Graphics.rvt. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. click the Revit Links tab. and click OK. select Custom. click the Revit Links tab. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. In this case. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. under Display Settings. You can click the value for Detail Level. click By Host View. 20 For c_Townhouse. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. select <Custom>. under Floor Plans. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness.rvt. medium. By selecting custom under Model Categories. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. double-click Level 1. and then set the detail level to coarse.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. 23 In the Model categories list. 16 Under Visibility.rvt. no detail level changes are required. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. By default. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. or fine. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . 14 On the View menu. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Using the Custom option. on the Basics tab. 24 Click OK. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. With linked files. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser.

This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. all new. select c_Townhouse. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. there are situations. In the next exercise. However. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. click OK. With the Show All filter applied. click Save. 26 Under Display Settings. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. In most cases. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. phase. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. on a sloped site for instance. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. under Visibility. By default. In this exercise. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. you need this project file open and in this view. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and phase filter of a specific link.rvt. 31 On the File menu. In this case. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. click Custom for the Townhouse link. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. In this case. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. All other components are grayed out. demolished. existing. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. you manage the linked files. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. 29 Click OK. 28 Select By linked view for View range. 25 On the Revit Links tab. this is preferable.

any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. 7 Click OK. and Saved Path fields are read only. Locations Not Saved. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. The default path type is Relative. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . click Manage Links. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. the link is maintained. 5 Click Unload. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. Notice the Loaded. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. click Yes. In general. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. click the Revit tab. 4 Under Linked File. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. 6 At the confirmation prompt. select c_Condo_Complex. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. You learn more about this in the next lesson. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified.rvt. 3 Under Path Type. do so before continuing. In a shared coordinate environment. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. They supply information regarding the links.

click the arrow next to the Open button. 8 In the Project Browser. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. If you choose not to open that workset. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled.rvt. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. 9 On the File menu. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. expand Revit Links. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. click Save As. When you initially place the link. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. right-click c_Condo_Complex. In general. the link is not loaded. and select Specify. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. In these cases. and click Reload. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. However. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. To do this. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset.

In essence. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. leave the project file open in its current view. When you share coordinates between projects. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. name the file Site_Project. If you have not completed the previous lesson. and save it as an RVT file. and the resulting project files. In the next lesson. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. In this exercise. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. The host file consists primarily of site components. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. you are establishing a shared origin point. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. When Revit project views are exported to DWG.10 In the Save As dialog. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . When used in conjunction with model linking. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). do so before continuing. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project.

You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the lesson.rvt and click Open. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. do so before continuing. click the Condo Complex. Linking Building Models on page 772. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. open it before continuing. In this case. Select Site_Project. 3 In the drawing area.coordinates are used. As indicated in the Status Bar. When you are working in the host project. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Open. 2 On the Tools menu. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. If you have closed the project. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

5 On the Design Bar. Lot B. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. However.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. In this exercise. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. click to select it. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. On the Status Bar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. select Location 1. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. when the edges highlight. even though both models originate from one linked file. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. do so before continuing. you need this project file open and in this view. but can have multiple additional locations. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. it is placed at a specific location. this location is not saved outside of the host project. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. and Lot C. If you have not completed the exercise. and click OK. These three locations can be named Lot A. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process.

9 In the Select Location dialog. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. click Reconcile. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. click Not Shared for Shared Location. and click OK.2 On the Options Bar. enter Lot A for New. click Not Shared for Shared Location. select Move instance to. and click OK. click OK. When constraining a link to a location. Record the current position as a location. 4 Under Value. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. In the Choose Location dialog. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. under Instance Parameters. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. . 12 On the Options Bar. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Rename dialog. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. click . under Instance Parameters. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. click Rename. This is a one-time operation. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . After a link instance is assigned a shared location. click Change. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.

NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. When you create a location. select Save. a warning displays. Record current position as. or cancel the action. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. 19 In the Select Location dialog. and click OK. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. 30 On the Tools menu. The second click specifies the move endpoint. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. select the second option. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. When you release the mouse button. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. To explicitly save a location. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. make sure Lot B is selected. ignore the warning. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. and then select the townhouse project. and the left townhouse resides at that location.Notice the OK button is not active. and click OK. click Manage Links. This is a two-click process. you cannot redefine its location. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. click OK. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 23 Click Save Locations. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. By relocating a project. Notice the OK button is still not active. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. click OK. When you relocate a project. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. The first click specifies the move start point. and click OK. Because Lot A is currently in use. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. 16 Click Change. the active location position is moved. click the Revit tab. Save locations 21 On the File menu. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. enter Lot B for Name. 26 Click OK. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. click Duplicate. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B.

35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. you work in one of the linked projects. In this exercise. 36 On the File menu. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. click Save. 33 On the Edit menu. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. and click OK. 34 On the File menu. click Close. select Save. NOTE In the following exercise. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects.

2 On the File menu. In this exercise. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model.rvt file. For Positioning.By Shared Coordinates. When opening the linked file. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. The current active location is Lot A. In addition. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. Select c_Condo_Complex. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Also. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. do so before continuing. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position.rvt file. Click Open. click Open. If you have not completed the exercises. Because this building model only has one named location. it is placed automatically within the host project. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. select Auto . Select c_Townhouse and click Open. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . double-click 1st Floor. under Floor Plans. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. if other models were linked into the same host. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files.

you create a new location. and click Make Current. you manage the shared locations. In this exercise. you can select Lot C if necessary. enter Lot C. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. and click OK. you need this project file open and in this view. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. 7 Click OK. If you have not completed the exercises. click OK. In the next exercise. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. click Manage Place and Locations. 6 Select Lot B. click View Properties. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . select True North for Orientation. and click OK. do so before continuing. In this exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. 3 In the Name dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. click Manage Place and Locations. click Duplicate. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. In the host file. under Graphics. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. orient a view to true north. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.

7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. You can save the file if you wish. click Open. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. If you have not completed the exercise. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. 10 On the File menu. do so before continuing.rvt and click Open. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. On the Options Bar. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. click Close. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. In this exercise. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. Select Site_Project.

and click Add. 5 Under Available fields. select Count. click the Fields tab. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Doors. under Category.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

right-click Door Schedule. under Other.8 Click OK. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. expand Schedules/Quantities. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. In this exercise. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Save. select Family and Type for Sort by. clear Itemize every instance. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. 13 On the File menu. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. 14 On the File menu. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. click Close. and click Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. You have completed this tutorial. 12 Select Grand totals. and then click OK twice. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

4 Under Colors. you create an office template. These settings control the graphics. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. click Training Files. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. click the Graphics tab. In the first lesson. click Browse.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. click OK. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. Notice that the drawing area is black. 10 In the Options dialog. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. 8 In the New Project dialog. journal cleanup options. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. which is independent of the project settings. under Template file. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. click the value for Selection color. click the Graphics tab. select Invert background color. 6 In the New Project dialog. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. you modify the system environment. In the second lesson. 803 . and your username when using worksets. and set it as your default template. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. Finally. notification preferences. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment.rte. 3 In the Options dialog. and click OK. 11 Under Colors. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. they are not saved to project files or template files. selection default options.

18 On the Design Bar. 13 Click the General tab. For Tooltip assistance. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. click Modify. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. and click OK. the elements causing the error display using this color. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. For Selection color. clear Invert background color. select One hour. 14 Under Notifications. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. click Modify. select red.12 In the Color dialog.rvt. and select the wall. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 22 When prompted to save changes. select yellow. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. and open Metric\m_Settings. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click No. However. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 15 Click OK. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. click the Graphics tab. When an error occurs. 26 In the Options dialog. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Training Files. 19 On the Design Bar. select None.

The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. and click Browse to select a template. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. you specify default file locations. However. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. select your preferred Save reminder interval. click Places. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. notice the list of library names. If prompted. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. you can start a new project with that template. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. family template files. TIP To view a template. Your login name displays by default. 3 Under Default template file. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. For Tooltip assistance. 2 In the Options dialog. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. click the File Locations tab. 4 Click Cancel. 8 Click Cancel.27 Click the General tab. and family libraries. select Normal. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). centralized. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. do not save the changes. click Browse. 5 Under Default path for user files. Specifying File Locations on page 805. 10 In the Places dialog. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. and click Open. such as in a large. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. Under Journal File Cleanup. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. Under Username. including your default project template. This path is set automatically during the installation process. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. under Default path for family template files. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. select the folder to save your files to by default. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. These files are used in the software support process. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. click Browse. click Browse. 7 In the Options dialog.

806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click (Add Value). and you can create new libraries. Load. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. In the following illustration. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and click Open. and click the icon side of the field. or families. templates. Save. and select it as the library path. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. under Libraries. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. 11 In the Places dialog. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects.library names and path. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. and Import dialogs. When you are opening. saving. and change the name to My Library. or loading a Revit Architecture file.

and click OK twice. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 23 Select My Library. click the Spelling tab. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. such as bump maps. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click Edit. view the current path. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. Load. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. and decal image files. 9 In the text editor. 21 Click the File Locations tab. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. click My Library. 3 Under Settings. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. custom color files. and Import dialogs. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. scroll down the list of building industry terms. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 5 In the text editor. 24 Click 25 Click OK. 15 Under Library Name. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. Save. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you work in a large office. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. click Edit. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. This path is determined during installation. 19 Click Cancel. enter sheetmtl-Cu. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. click the My Library icon. 28 Click OK. 2 In the Options dialog. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 22 Click Places. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. If you want to relocate this path. specify the new location here.

you modify snap settings. work with snapping turned off. under Template file. 14 Click in the drawing area. click OK. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 21 In the text editor. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. In this exercise. 2 In the New Project dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click OK. 18 In the Options dialog. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Restore Defaults. click Modify. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click Browse.11 In the Options dialog. 20 Under Personal dictionary. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. click Text. click Training Files. click the Spelling tab. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. As you zoom in and out within a view. 12 On the Standard toolbar. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. You can turn snap settings on and off. click OK. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 In the New Project dialog. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 22 In the text editor. click Edit. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. you modify snap increments. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click File menu ➤ Save. delete sheetmtl-CU.rte. If prompted. do not save the changes. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 23 In the Options dialog. 19 Under Settings. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click default template.

click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . and enter 500 . For example. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. zoom out until it does so. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . 7 Under Object Snaps. such as ZO to zoom out. If you do not have a wheel button. click OK. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. enter SM. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area.. click Wall. 10 On the Options Bar. snapping reverts to the system default settings. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching.6 Under Dimension Snaps. use the wheel button on your mouse. If it does not. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. clear Chain. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. and move the cursor to the right. While sketching. TIP To zoom while sketching. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Snaps dialog. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments.

click Modify. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. the midpoint. and delete the value 500 . 18 Enter SM. If you move the cursor along the wall.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. Notice that snapping is once again active. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and click Wall. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. and the wall edges.. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. 24 Click OK. and specify the wall endpoint. it will snap to the endpoints. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. and move the cursor to the right. Modifying Project Settings on page 811. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Do not set the wall end point. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. and do not save the file. This is the increment that you added previously. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 21 Move the cursor downward. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar.

Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. fill patterns. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. Finally. save the project file with a unique name. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. When you apply a material to an element. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. Using these options. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety.rvt. you render a region to observe the changes. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. You create and modify materials. lines. and open Metric\m_Settings.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. annotations. In the steps that follow. and object styles.

In the steps that follow. and double-click 02 Entry Level. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. In the Materials dialog. enter Masonry . and click OK. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. select Stone. this material provides a starting point for the new material. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . scale. and select Masonry . These details will display in rendered images. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. The properties describe the color.Stone. 3 Click (Duplicate).Fieldstone material.Fieldstone. and click OK. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. 6 Click Replace. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. When a model element is loaded into a project. read-only library for render appearances.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. for Class. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. Masonry . However. 2 Scroll down the materials list.Fieldstone. and texture of the material. and click (Element Properties). Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. When you change properties of a render appearance. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. 11 Click OK. 9 Click Apply. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. In the next exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 10 Click the Graphics tab. The Render Appearance Library is a local.

All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU.14 In the Element Properties dialog. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. 16 Enter the new wall name. 19 On the right side of the Material field. and click OK. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 .Fieldstone. click in the Material field. . 18 For Finish 1. 24 In the Type Selector.Fieldstone. click (Default 3D View). 20 In the Materials dialog. click Model Graphics Style. It is currently assigned the material Masonry .Brick. 25 On the View toolbar. select Masonry . and click OK. Fieldstone on CMU. 23 While pressing CTRL. 17 For Structure. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. 22 Select the left exterior wall. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. click This is the material that you created. 15 Click Duplicate. 26 On the View Control Bar. click Edit. 21 Click OK three times. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. select the rear exterior wall. click Edit/New.

In the following exercise. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. click Render. select Region. for Setting. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. click Rendering Dialog. 32 In the Rendering dialog. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. under Quality. The rendering process begins. 31 In the Rendering dialog. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. right-click the Design Bar. select the render region (a red rectangle). 29 In the 3D view. 28 In the Rendering dialog. and click Rendering. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. When finished. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. select Low or Medium.

7 Under Custom. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. and clear Region. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog.rvt. Then click Render again. in the Rendering dialog.rvt. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. Drafting pattern density is fixed. 33 In the Rendering dialog. select Custom. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. click Import. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. and double-click West. click Show the model. 5 Click New. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. Zoom into the model. m_Settings-in progress. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. expand Elevations. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. 3 Under Pattern Type. choose Model. such as steel. click Show the model. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area.

Fieldstone material.56.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. for Finish 1. 11 Click OK. click Training Files. under Pattern Type. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click to select a fill pattern. select Model. click OK. In the Materials dialog.Fieldstone. click Edit. click 15 For Structure. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 18 Under Surface Pattern. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . enter Fieldstone. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. 10 For Name. click Modify. (Element Properties). click in the Material field. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 21 In the Materials dialog. 23 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill.pat. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. enter . click . select fldstn. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. 9 Under Custom. and click OK. and for Import scale. 13 On the Options Bar. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. 22 Click OK three times.

and double-click 3 Windows. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. m_Settings-in progress. TIP If the pattern does not display. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. For example. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. adjust your zoom settings as needed. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. you can set the window frame material to By Category. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 On the keyboard. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click (Default 3D View). The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options.25 On the View toolbar. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. expand 3D Views. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . there are often multiple window types within a project. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types.rvt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). Controlling Object Styles on page 817.

818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click . under Materials and Finishes. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. for Trim Exterior Material. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. for Trim Exterior Material. 11 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. 9 Click OK twice. 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. 5 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Materials dialog. 10 Select the arched window. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value column. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. and click 15 Click OK twice. click in the Value column. . click By Category. click (Element Properties). This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click By Category (located under the materials list). click Edit/New.3 On the View Control Bar. click (Element Properties). 8 In the Materials dialog.

for Name. for Class. 25 In the search field. select Paint. (Duplicate). expand Windows. 28 Under Shading. click OK. descriptions. or keywords include the word red. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. . type red.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and click OK. When you render a 3D view. enter Trim . and click OK. click in the Material column. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. select Trim. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. click OK. 19 For Trim. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. and select Trim. 29 In the Materials dialog. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. 18 On the Model Objects tab. 23 Click Replace. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges.red paint. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. select Use Render Appearance for Shading.

enter Roof Line. select Roof Line. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. for Name. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.31 On the View toolbar. (Default 3D view). you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof.rvt. under Category. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. Now that you have created a line pattern. select Red. 7 On the View Control Bar.rvt. 11 For Line Pattern. m_Settings-in progress. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. select Roofs. click New. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. m_Settings-in progress. 10 For Line Color. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. is open with the 3D view active. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

14 On the View Control Bar. double-click to Building. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . click Model Graphics Style. Notice that the line color displays in this view. under 3D Views. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. but not the line pattern.12 Click OK. 13 In the Project Browser.

and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. select Roof Line. under Category. under Floor Plans. select Roofs. select Roofs. 20 Click OK. double-click 03 Roof. select Blue. For Color. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 19 For Line Pattern. elevations. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. For Pattern. 15 In the Project Browser. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. sections. Plans. select Solid. select 5. 18 For Line Color. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select Black. click Override. 22 On the Model Categories tab. for Visibility. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view.

Notice the site topography and the property lines. under Floor Plans. 34 On the Options Bar. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. Click Click (Draw). 29 For Name. select Zoning Setback. select 2. 33 In the Type Selector. click Lines. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. For Line Pattern. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. (Line). enter Zoning Setback.25 Click OK twice. specify the following: ■ For Plane. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. For Line Color. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. select Double dash. select Level: 02 Entry Level. 31 Click OK. click New. select Red. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . under Modify Subcategories. double-click Site. and click OK. This places the line above the topography.

double-click 02 Entry Level. 39 Click OK. and clear Property Lines. and clear Zoning Setback. 44 On the View toolbar. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. NOTE If Site is not selected. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. under Floor Plans. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. 36 On the View toolbar. select it. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Expand Site. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. 40 In the Project Browser.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. (Default 3D View). 38 On the Model Categories tab. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Modifying Annotations on page 825. click (Default 3D View). 43 Click OK. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and clear Zoning Setback. and then clear Property Lines. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. expand Lines.

7 Click OK twice. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. and place a dimension on the floor plan. 4 Enter the name Linear . click Dimension. Modifying Annotations | 825 . double-click 02 Entry Level. click another wall. under Floor Plans. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. click Duplicate. for Units Format. select Feet and fractional inches. To place a dimension. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number.rvt. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. select Linear . is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. click the default value. click one wall. and then click outside the second wall.Imperial and click OK. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 Under Text. You have created a new dimension style. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. For Units. m_Settings-in progress. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Standard toolbar.Modifying Annotations In this exercise.rvt. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type.Imperial. m_Settings-in progress. 9 In the Type Selector. (Undo). click Modify. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. click (Element Properties). This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. 18 In the Tags dialog. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. select the 3 window tags. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the steps that follow. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. Then press Delete. 16 Click Cancel. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the drop-down arrow that displays.Number. 26 On the Options Bar. 19 Click Load. Leave M_Window Tag . click Training Files. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. click the bottom window. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. 23 Click OK. 22 Under Loaded Tags. 27 On the west wall. click Tag All Not Tagged. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . click M_Window Tag . scroll down to Windows. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. 21 In the Tags dialog. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . clear Leader.rfa.14 On the Options Bar. under Category. click Tag ➤ By Category. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. notice that the label displays 1i. 24 While pressing CTRL.Number.Number is now the assigned tag.Number as the assigned tag. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. 28 On the Design Bar. In the preview image.

click the default value. and Detail Level Options | 827 . In the second section. m_Settings-in progress. Unless overridden. 32 On the View toolbar. select To the nearest 100.rvt. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 30 Under Leader. Temporary Dimensions. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. dimension values display using this setting. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. verify that Create is clear. click the default value. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. Specifying Units of Measurement. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. (Default 3D View). Specifying Units of Measurement. Unless overridden. 4 In the Project Units dialog. notice Window Tags appears twice. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. and click OK. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Specifying Units of Measurement. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. for Rounding. for Length. select meters squared. you specify the project units of measurements. dimensions use these project settings. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. for Area.Temporary Dimensions. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. 3 In the Format dialog. 9 Under Doors and Windows. click Modify. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. you modify the temporary dimension settings. select Openings. M_Window Tag . and click OK. 6 Click OK. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. you modify the detail level assignments. For Unit symbol. 2 In the Project Units dialog.Number. 8 Under Walls.Temporary Dimensions.Under Category. In the first section. the other displays the instance value. Click OK. In the final section. select 0 decimal places. select Faces. and Detail Level Options on page 827. 31 On the Design Bar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.

Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. click Training Files.In this project. You do not select a view scale to move it. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. 12 Click OK. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level.rvt. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. click . The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. In this table. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. In this exercise. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 15 Proceed to the next exercise. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. and expand 3D Views.

4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click Apply. select Discipline. and click OK.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. expand each view type. 10 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click OK.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. select Type/Discipline. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. 2 In the Project Browser. and notice that each is grouped by discipline.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . expand both the Architectural and Structural views. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . notice that views are grouped by phase. expand Sheets (all).Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. In the Project Browser. In the Project Browser. 8 Select Phase. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . 5 On the Views tab.

16 Click the Views tab. 12 Click the Sheets tab. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. expand each sheet set. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. and click OK. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. under Sheets. click the Folders tab.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click New.

you select the starting point for your office template. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. levels. If you want to save this file. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. and expand both Architectural and Structural. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. when you create a new project. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. and click Open.20 In the Browser Organization dialog.rte template. Creating an Office Template on page 831. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. For example. You can also save these settings in a template file. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. You can choose from several templates. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. 21 In the Project Browser. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. When you create new projects. Creating an Office Template | 831 . You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. In this lesson. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. In the lesson that follows. the same rules apply. and view names. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. View Type (Family and Type). The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. and Discipline. 2 Under Template file. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. click Browse. Proceed to the next lesson. In that case. and open Metric\Templates. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. enter a unique file name. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. expand Complete. and click OK. expand 3D Views. dimensions styles. When you create a new template based on an existing template. click Training Files. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. under Views. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. you create an office template. Whenever you create a new project or template. and click OK. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. navigate to your preferred directory.

5 In the New Project dialog. 14 Click Open. 7 In the Project Browser. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. In this exercise. For example. drag a zoom region around the level heads. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 13 Select the default template. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. close them. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. select Project template. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Browse. and click OK. in the drawing area. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. If you want to use a template other than the default. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. you modify the project settings for your new template. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. and double-click North. weights. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. 6 Click OK. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. for Create new. select Project. you can select it now. 9 In the Project Browser. When you create the material. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 15 Under Create new. 12 Under Template File. If you have additional projects open. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

see the previous lesson. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. or refer to the online help. TIP For more information about creating new materials.During this exercise. including color. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. or refer to the online help. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. or modify existing patterns. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. line colors. For more details on modifying these settings. Modifying System Settings on page 803. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. specific modifications are not dictated. and similar attributes. In the Object Styles dialog. and materials for model objects. texture. 4 Click Replace. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . You can align. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. annotation objects. create and modify them as needed. Observe the materials that are already defined. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. create new subcategories. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. 2 Scroll down the materials list. and scroll through the list of categories. and move model patterns. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. and change render appearance properties. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. If you change render appearance properties. transparency. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. the changes are saved as part of the project template. line patterns. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. 9 Click OK when finished. rotate. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. You do this by defining the render appearance. 13 If necessary. see a preview of the rendered material. For more information. When you create or modify a material. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. you can set line weights. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. and imported objects. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials.

and specify the properties. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. or line pattern as needed.15 Modify categories. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. and click Edit. and create new subcategories as needed. modify the line weight. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. create new line subcategories. line color. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. tags. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. 32 To modify a line pattern. 19 If necessary. select it from this list. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 20 Click OK. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. 18 For existing line categories. To see the details of a particular style. 29 Click OK. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 34 Click OK. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. and dimensions. such as section lines and dimension lines. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. select it. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. name the style. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. You can add and delete view scales. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. click Duplicate. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale.

Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. and radial dimensions are modified separately. 46 Click OK. To see the details of a particular style. Linear. In the Tags dialog. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. 57 Specify the Slope option. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. Volume. 53 For Length. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. 50 To load new annotation tags. For example. click Load. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. click Format. 55 Click OK. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. click Duplicate. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. 60 Under Walls. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. name the style. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. and click OK.40 Click OK. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. select it from this list. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. 62 Click OK. TIP In the drawing area. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. angular. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. and choose a decimal symbol. when you add a door with the tag option selected. 58 Click OK. and Angle settings. and specify the properties. 61 Under Doors and Windows.

68 Delete. rename. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Links to associated tutorials are provided. 71 Delete. 69 If necessary. 70 Click the Sheets tab. Medium. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. and move view scales as needed. or Fine. Although these settings can be saved within a template. rename. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. Use the table below as a checklist. You can find additional information in Help. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. However. Each command is available on the Settings menu. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. create new browser organization types. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. and make modifications in each area as necessary. Using the arrows between the columns. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. or edit existing organization types. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. 65 Click OK. create new browser organization types. you can move view scales from one detail level to another.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. 73 Click OK. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. For example. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. The detail level is based on view scale. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. In such a case. To move the view scales. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. When you create a new view. In a typical project. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. 72 If necessary. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. 64 Review the table. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. click the Views tab. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. click the arrows between columns. See Setting up If necessary. or edit existing organization types. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment.

You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. notice the list of doors already loaded. If necessary. click Door. furniture. Although the options are endless. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. the section cut material. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. do so before starting this exercise. you do both. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. you can move onto the next component type. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. In the steps that follow. Depending on the intended use of this template. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. 2 In the Type Selector. there are some important thoughts to consider. title blocks. and electrical fixtures. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . For example. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. you can set up the phases. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. or electrical fixtures. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. you may want to delete. you could load detail components. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. and the poche depth. or use the Project Browser. phase filters. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. In addition. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. However. You can load any family or group into a template. if you load every available window type. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. modify. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. If this selection is satisfactory. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you can set the default contour line interval. or add to this selection. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. For example. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. Although this is possible.

click Edit/New. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. or load a new door type.3 To modify. click Load. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. Notice that each family category is listed. click Bar. or modify a door. and click OK. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. Select it. create. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. Modify type properties. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. Make modifications. and click OK. and click OK. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Click Duplicate. create. expand Families. and click Open. In the Element Properties dialog. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. Enter a name.

In this exercise. Discipline. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. 13 Click OK. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . (Element Properties). 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps.) 10 Expand the title block. click Load. load. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. Detail Level. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. click 12 Click Preview. you created new projects using different templates. This title block is currently part of the template. In addition. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. In addition. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. and click Delete. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. create. To do so. View Range. and select the title block type. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. you create the views required for your template. To load a title block. right-click the component. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. 11 On the Options Bar.

18 If you modified any other view templates. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. under Floor Plans. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. the view is not linked to the template in any way. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. 4 If necessary. 15 In the Project Browser. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. under Elevations. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. you can apply a view template to any view. open the view from the Project Browser. and click OK. you will first modify view templates. double-click South. 2 Under Names. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. double-click Level 2. 6 Click OK. After applying the template. and double-click Level 1. In addition. select Architectural Plan.settings of categories and subcategories. click Apply. Every time a new plan view is created. under Floor Plans. In this exercise. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. and apply the appropriate template. and then click OK. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. At any time. and click OK. double-click Site. select Site Plan. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. 11 Click Apply. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. click Apply. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. 12 In the Project Browser.

and select the desired direction. under Floor Plans. in the shortcut menu. 23 To add more levels to the template. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. 20 In the Project Browser. To orient the 3D view to a direction. (Default 3D View). a face. right-click the ViewCube. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. 30 In the Project Browser. review the floor plans. and click Rename. click Orient to a Direction. Blue level heads have associated plan views. and click Properties. select Make Plan View. click Schedule/Quantities. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. or delete them as needed. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. and select the desired view. 24 On the Options Bar. right-click the view name.Notice the level names. If you want to modify view properties. 21 In the Project Browser. 31 Rename the 3D View. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. review the existing floor plans. notice that you have the option to rename. click Orient to View. right-click {3D}. and elevations. Rename. If prompted. in the Project Browser. use the ViewCube. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. By default. 27 Create additional levels as needed. If it does not display. or delete this view. ceiling plans. under 3D Views. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. Black level heads have no associated views. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . and. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. click 29 In the Project Browser. right-click the ViewCube. and click Save View. To orient the 3D view to another view. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. enter a view name. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. 22 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. duplicate. expand 3D Views. on the View toolbar. duplicate. click Level. or an edge of the ViewCube. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. right-click Level 1. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. right-click the ViewCube.

On the Appearance tab. modify settings as needed. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet.txt for AutoCAD. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click OK. 42 Create new sheets as needed.You can add schedules to a template. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. or exportlayersdgn. On the Formatting tab. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. 37 Click OK. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. You can still add views to the sheet. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. select the title block and delete it. select and order required fields. You are prompted to select a title block. To later add a title block to a sheet. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. modify settings as needed. select the default title block. modify settings as needed. select one. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select the category type. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. and click OK. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. After the sheet is created. 40 To add views to the sheet. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Select a view. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. When you import a DWG or DXF file. click Add View. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. expand Sheets (all). on the View tab of the Design Bar. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. and click OK. Right-click the sheet name. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. and click Rename.txt for MicroStation). in the Project Browser. and click Add View to Sheet. To do so. On the Filter tab. click Sheet. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. assign filters. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. and modify their properties accordingly.

5 For each category. click Save As. 8 In the dialog. When you create a multi-category schedule. and so on. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. 2 For each category. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). doors. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. for example. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. therefore. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. and click Save. windows. These settings are retained within the project template. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. You can save these mappings to a text file. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. When you import a DWG or DXF file. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. For example. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. and they become the set mappings for the project. Using shared parameters. and click Save. name the file. 9 Click Save As. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. When scheduling. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. name the file. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. and related multi-category tags and schedules. project parameters. 10 Proceed to the next exercise.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. name the file. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . and click Save. select Save As. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. They cannot be shared with other projects. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. and so on.

click New. and click OK. and specify its discipline and type. click Add. If this template will be used by multiple team members. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. under Groups. project parameters. 26 Click OK. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. 3 Name and save the file. and choose a shared parameter. enter a parameter name. 18 Under Type of Parameter. 24 To add a shared project parameter. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. 2 Click Create. 11 For each parameter group. because each office has a unique set of needs. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. you may want to save the file to a network location. click New. and select Shared Parameter. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. 6 Create as many groups as needed. 17 Under Discipline. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 5 Enter the group name. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. select Project parameter. 14 Click Add. you can create a list of parameters. 19 Under Group parameter under. select a group to add parameters to. 9 Name the parameter. add required parameters. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. 21 Under Categories. for Name. 22 Click OK. For each parameter group. 8 Under Parameters. select a parameter value type. 23 Add project parameters as needed. select a parameter discipline type. 25 Click Select. If a file already exists. 10 Click OK. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. 16 Under Parameter Data.

38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. By going first to the Print command. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. The tag is now part of the template. 37 When you have completed the schedule. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. Click OK. save the file as a template. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. select Multi-Category. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. For each printer. make minor modifications if necessary. 2 Under Printer. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. In this exercise. enter a name for the schedule. For information on creating multi-category tags. click Setup. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. and the percent of actual size. select the tag. you need only select a setting. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. 4 Modify the printer settings. or refer to the online help. 28 Click OK.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. 3 Under Settings. click OK. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. and make it your default template file. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. click Schedule/Quantities. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. 34 For Category. for Name. By creating named settings within the template. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . paper placement. and click OK. 5 Click Save As. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 6 In the New dialog. and print. you create named print settings. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you can set options such as sheet sizes. 32 Navigate to the directory. you can load them into the template. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. and click Open. 35 For Name.

Create additional settings as needed. click Save as. and saved them to a template. and click OK. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Your template is complete. In this lesson. 15 Name the template. and click Save. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. You can also set this template as your default template. 22 Click the File Locations tab. 24 Navigate to the template location. loaded components. modify the printer settings. 11 Click Close when finished. 14 Under Save as type. enter a new name for the printer. save it in a network location. If you have a project. The only remaining task is to save it. By investing the time to individualize your template.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. you ensure that office standards are maintained. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. In addition. select a different printer. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 18 Click Browse. and click Open. 23 For Default template file. you modified settings. 25 Click OK. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. 9 In the Print dialog. click Setup. click Browse. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.rte). and create new settings for this printer. In addition. select it. and click Open. 20 Click OK. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. This can provide a good starting point for a template. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. If you need to share this file with others. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. 19 Select the template. select Template Files (*. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project.